Lexus - ES 350 - Owners Manual - 2009 - 2009

Pictorial index Search by illustration 1 For safety and security Make sure to read through them 2 Instrument cluster How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc. 3 Operation of each Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc. component 4 Driving Operations and advices which are necessary for driving 5 Interior features Usage of the interior features, etc. 6 Maintenance and care Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures 7 When trouble arises What to do in case of malfunction or emergency 8 Vehicle specifications Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc. 9 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners Index ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Search by symptom Search alphabetically 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS For your information................................... 8 Reading this manual...................................14 How to search ..............................................15 Pictorial index...............................................16 1 2 2. For safety and security 1-1. For safe use Before driving................................. 28 For safety drive...............................30 Seat belts.......................................... 32 SRS airbags.....................................38 Front passenger occupant classification system.................. 49 Safety information for children ................................... 54 Child restraint systems ............... 55 Installing child restraints............. 59 Exhaust gas precautions............ 69 1-2. Hybrid system Hybrid system features (hybrid vehicles)......................... 70 Hybrid system precautions (hybrid vehicles).......................... 74 1-3. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system (gasoline vehicles).....................80 Immobilizer system (hybrid vehicles)......................... 82 Alarm................................................. 84 3 Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators..............................88 Gauges and meters..................... 93 Multi-information display ..........98 Energy monitor/ consumption screen............... 108 Operation of each component 3-1. Key information Keys ...................................................120 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start.............123 Wireless remote control...........136 Doors................................................139 Trunk..................................................144 3-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats........................................ 151 Driving position memory..........153 Head restraints .............................159 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel..............................162 Inside rear view mirror ..............164 Outside rear view mirrors........ 167 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Power windows.............................170 Moon roof....................................... 173 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 4 Driving 4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle ..................... 180 Cargo and luggage......................191 Vehicle load limits........................194 Trailer towing .................................195 Dinghy towing...............................196 4-2. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch (gasoline vehicles)....................197 Power (ignition) switch (hybrid vehicles)......................204 EV drive mode (hybrid vehicles)......................... 211 Automatic transmission (gasoline vehicles)....................214 Hybrid transmission (hybrid vehicles)........................217 Turn signal lever............................221 Parking brake .............................. 222 Horn ................................................ 223 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch .........................224 Automatic High Beam............. 228 Fog light switch ........................... 234 Windshield wipers and washer ................................ 235 4-4. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 239 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems Cruise control ..............................244 Dynamic radar cruise control............................ 248 LDA (Lane Departure Alert)........ 263 Intuitive parking assist................ 271 Rear view monitor system ..... 284 Driving mode select switch........................................... 296 Driving assist systems ..............298 Hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles)......................304 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .........306 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......313 • Blind Spot Monitor function ......................................317 • Rear Cross Traffic Alert function ....................................320 4-6. Driving tips Hybrid vehicle driving tips (hybrid vehicles) ..................... 323 Winter driving tips..................... 326 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS Interior features 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Lexus Display Audio system..........................................334 Display settings........................... 339 Setup menu ....................................341 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system (with the Lexus Display Audio system).......... 347 Automatic air conditioning system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system).......... 359 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ...........372 Windshield wiper de-icer........ 374 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Audio system (with the Lexus Display Audio system)........... 376 Using the radio ............................379 Using the CD player ................ 394 Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs.................. 395 Listening to an iPod...................405 Listening to a USB memory ..........................413 Using the AUX port ..................422 Listening to Bluetooth® audio ....................424 Optimal use of the audio system ..................... 439 Using the steering wheel audio switches............................441 Hands-free system (for cellular phone) ................ 444 Using the Bluetooth® phone............................................452 Setting the hands-free system............................................ 471 Bluetooth® settings ..................484 5 5-4. Using the audio system Audio system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system) .......................... 493 Using the radio ........................... 496 Using the CD player ................505 Playing MP3 and WMA discs .................................514 Operating an iPod..................... 522 Operating a USB memory .... 532 Bluetooth® audio system.........541 Using the Bluetooth® audio system ............................. 545 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player.......550 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player....... 554 Bluetooth® audio system setup ...............................561 Optimal use of the audio system ............................. 562 Using the AUX port ................. 564 Using the steering wheel audio switches..........................565 Hands-free system (for cellular phone) ................568 Using the hands-free system (for cellular phones) ...............573 Making a phone call .................. 581 Setting a cellular phone ..........585 Security and system setup......590 Using the phone book ............. 595 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list .........................603 • Interior light............................604 • Personal lights .......................604 5-6. Using the storage features List of storage features ............606 • Glove box ...............................608 • Console box ..........................609 • Cup holders.............................610 • Auxiliary box............................. 611 Trunk features................................612 5-7. Other interior features Sun visors and vanity mirrors.....................614 Clock ................................................615 Power outlets.................................616 Heated steering wheel..............618 Seat heaters/ seat ventilators......................... 620 Armrest...........................................622 Rear sunshade/ rear door sunshades.............. 623 Trunk storage extension...........626 Coat hooks....................................627 Assist grips ................................... 628 Garage door opener ............... 629 Compass ....................................... 636 Safety Connect.............................641 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS Maintenance and care 6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ................650 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.................. 654 6-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements .............................657 General maintenance..............660 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs.................................... 664 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions................................ 665 Hood............................................... 669 Positioning a floor jack..............670 Engine compartment ................673 12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles)......................690 Tires.................................................. 694 Tire inflation pressure ............... 703 Wheels ........................................... 706 Air conditioning filter ............... 708 Electronic key battery................710 Checking and replacing fuses................................................712 Light bulbs .....................................724 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises 7-1. Essential information Emergency flashers ...................740 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency.......741 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed.................................743 If you think something is wrong................. 749 Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline vehicles).................. 750 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds....... 751 If a warning message is displayed ...................................761 If you have a flat tire .................. 784 If the engine will not start (gasoline vehicles)...................797 If the hybrid system will not start (hybrid vehicles)............ 799 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ...................... 801 If the electronic key does not operate properly.....................802 7 If the 12-volt battery is discharged (gasoline vehicles)......................................805 If the 12-volt battery is discharged (hybrid vehicles)......................................809 If your vehicle overheats (gasoline vehicles)................... 813 If your vehicle overheats (hybrid vehicles)....................... 816 If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................................820 8 9 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.....................................868 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)..............................................869 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)................................................871 2 3 Index Vehicle specifications 8-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) .................. 824 Fuel information.......................... 837 Tire information...........................840 1 4 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ...............................882 Alphabetical index ............................... 888 8-2. Customization Customizable features ............852 8-3. Items to initialize Items to initialize.........................865 5 6 7 8 9 For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below. • Navigation system • Air conditioning controls • Windshield wiper de-icer • Audio/video system • Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging • Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8 For your information Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment. Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 9 Installation of a mobile two-way radio system The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: ● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system ● Dynamic radar cruise control system ● Cruise control system ● Anti-lock brake system ● SRS airbag system ● Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. Hybrid vehicles: High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding. Hybrid vehicles: Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 10 Vehicle data recordings Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as: • Engine speed • Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) (hybrid vehicles) • Accelerator status • Brake status • Vehicle speed • Shift position • Hybrid battery (traction battery) status (hybrid vehicles) The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures. ● Data usage Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: • With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit • For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner ● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only) If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 11 Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. ● Disclosure of the EDR data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: • An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Lexus may: • Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance • Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 12 Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries. CAUTION ■ General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 13 CAUTION ■ General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) (hybrid vehicles) Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Lexus dealers. Do not dispose of the battery yourself. Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death of serious injury: ● The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock. ● The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur. When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers. ■ Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery) (hybrid vehicles) If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 14 Reading this manual CAUTION: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people. NOTICE: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment. Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order. Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). Indicates the component or position being explained. Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”. ■ Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles Information for hybrid vehicles is written in brackets next to the information for gasoline vehicles Example Turn the engine*1 *2 switch to IGNITION ON*1 *2 mode. *1: Gasoline vehicles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) *2: Hybrid vehicles 15 How to search ■ Searching by name • Alphabetical index .........P. 888 ■ Searching by installation position • Pictorial index........................ P. 16 ■ Searching by symptom or sound • What to do if... (Troubleshooting)............ P. 882 ■ Searching by title • Table of contents ....................P. 2 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 16 Pictorial index Pictorial index ■ Exterior 1 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 139 Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 124, 136 Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 170 Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 802 Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 754, 766 2 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 144 Opening from inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 144 Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 124, 136 Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 803 Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 754, 767 3 Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167 Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167 Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167 Driving position memory*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 153 Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Pictorial index 17 4 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235 Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 326 To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 374 Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 652 5 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239 Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239 Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 828 6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 694 Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 835 Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 326 Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 694 Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 784 7 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 669 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 669 Engine compartment cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 675 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 829 Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 813, 816 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 766 Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving (Replacing method: P. 724, Watts: P. 836) 8 Headlights/parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 224 9 Fog lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 234 10 Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 221 11 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 224 12 Stop/tail lights Hill-start assist control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 304 13 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 224 14 Back-up lights Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214, 217 15 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 224 * *1: If equipped 2: Hybrid vehicles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 18 Pictorial index ■ Instrument panel 1 “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 197, 204 Starting the engine /changing the modes . . . . . . P. 197, 204 Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 741 When the engine will not start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 797, 799 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 777 2 Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214, 217 Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214, 217 Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 743 When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 801 3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 93 Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 93 Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 88 When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 751 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Pictorial index 19 4 Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 98 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 98 When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 761 5 Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222 Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222 Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 327 Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 761 6 Turn signal lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 221 Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 224 Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . P. 224 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 234 7 Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235 Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 689 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 774 8 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 740 9 Fuel filler door opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 241 Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239 Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 828 10 Trunk opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 144 11 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 669 12 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 162 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 162 Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 153 13 Tilt and telescopic steering rock release lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 162 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 162 14 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 347, 359 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 347, 359 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372 15 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376, 493 Hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444, 568 *: If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 20 Pictorial index ■ Switches 1 Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167 2 Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 94 3 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 94 4 Automatic High Beam switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 228 5 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 313 6 Intuitive parking assist switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 271 7 Windshield wiper de-icer switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 374 8 Tire pressure warning reset switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 695 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Pictorial index 21 1 Driving position memory switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 153 2 Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 139 3 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 170 4 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 170 5 Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 145 6 PCS OFF switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 307 *: If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 22 Pictorial index 1 Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 441, 565 1 2 Back switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444 1 3 Talk switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444, 574 1 4 Telephone switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444, 574 5 “DISP” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 99 2 6 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 251 2 7 Cruise control switch * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 244 Dynamic radar cruise control switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 248 2 8 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 162 2 9 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Pictorial index 23 2 2 1 Seat heater switches* /seat heater and ventilator switches* . . . . P. 620 2 2 Heated steering wheel switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 618 2 3 Rear sunshade switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 623 4 Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 296 3 5 EV drive mode switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211 6 VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 300 1, 2 7 Remote Touch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109 2 8 Lexus Display Audio controller* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109, 334 *1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. *2: If equipped 3 * : Hybrid vehicles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 24 Pictorial index ■ Interior 1 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38 2 Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28 3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 151 4 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 159 5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32 6 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 609 7 Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 139 8 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 610 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Pictorial index 25 1 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164 2 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 614 3 Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 614 4 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 604 1 5 Personal lights* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 604 6 Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 173 2 7 “SOS” button* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 641 8 Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 629 *1: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear. *2: If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 26 Pictorial index ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 27 For safety and security 1 1-1. For safe use Before driving.................................28 For safety drive...............................30 Seat belts .......................................... 32 SRS airbags .....................................38 Front passenger occupant classification system.................. 49 Safety information for children....................................54 Child restraint systems ...............55 Installing child restraints.............59 Exhaust gas precautions............ 69 1-2. Hybrid system Hybrid system features (hybrid vehicles) ......................... 70 Hybrid system precautions (hybrid vehicles) ..........................74 1-3. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system (gasoline vehicles).....................80 Immobilizer system (hybrid vehicles) .........................82 Alarm .................................................84 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 28 1-1. For safe use Before driving Floor mat Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet. 1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets. 2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place. *: Always align the * marks. The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 29 CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death or a serious injury. ■ When installing the driver’s floor mat 1 ● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, ● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat. ● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. ● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. ● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down. ■ Before driving ● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor. ● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats. 30 1-1. For safe use For safety drive For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving. Correct driving posture 1 Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (P. 151) 2 Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (P. 151) 3 Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 159) 4 Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 32) Correct use of the seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (P. 32) Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 55) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 31 Adjusting the mirrors Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (P. 164, 167) CAUTION ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint. ● Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. 1 32 1-1. For safe use Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. Correct use of the seat belts ● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ● Adjust the position of the seat- back. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ● Do not twist the seat belt. Fastening and releasing the seat belt 1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. 2 To release the seat belt, press the release button. Release button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 33 Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats) 1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button. 2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up. Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats) The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision. The pretensioner does not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click. 1 34 1-1. For safe use Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system) If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat belt will retract before the collision. (P. 306) ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 59) ■ Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 55) ● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol- low the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 32) ■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. ■ Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 35 CAUTION Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■ Wearing a seat belt ● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. 1 ● Always wear a seat belt properly. than one person at once, including children. ● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. ■ Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 32) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security ● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more 36 1-1. For safe use CAUTION ■ People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 32) ■ When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■ Seat belt pretensioners If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer. ■ Adjustable shoulder anchor Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 33) ■ Seat belt damage and wear ● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. ● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. ● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. ● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage. ● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 37 CAUTION ■ Using a seat belt extender ● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended. NOTICE ■ When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security ● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by 1 38 1-1. For safe use SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. ◆ SRS front airbags 1 SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components 2 SRS knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 39 ◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags 3 SRS front side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants SRS rear side airbags Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats 4 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1 For safety and security SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats 40 1-1. For safe use SRS airbag system components 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Front passenger occupant clas- 9 Front side airbags sification system (ECU and sen- 10 SRS warning light sors) 11 Driver airbag Side impact sensors (front 12 Rear side airbags doors) 13 Side impact sensors (rear) Knee airbags 14 Driver’s seat position sensor Front passenger airbag 15 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch Curtain shield airbags 16 Airbag sensor assembly “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG 17 Front passenger’s seat belt OFF” indicator lights buckle switch Seat belt pretensioners and 18 Front impact sensors force limiters Side impact sensors (front) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 41 Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. ■ SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. ● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security CAUTION 1 42 1-1. For safe use CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● If the seat belt extender has been con- nected to the front seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. ● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. ● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri- ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 55) ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 43 CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. ● Do not allow the front seat occupants to 1 hold items on their knees. rail or the front, side and rear pillars. ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas- senger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. ● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad, lower portion of the instrument panel and door of the glove box. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy. ● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security ● Do not lean against the door, the roof side 44 1-1. For safe use CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy. ● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it. ● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. ● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 45 CAUTION ■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. ● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags 1 ● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument ● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment ● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo bar etc.) ● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players ● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. ● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ● The windshield may crack. ● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 641) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security panel, dashboard, glove box, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails 46 1-1. For safe use ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags) ● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform). However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations: • If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact • If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck ● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate. ● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passen- ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 49) ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) ● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]). ● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal colli- sion. ■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. ● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface ● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole ● Landing hard or falling ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 47 ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags) The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. ● Collision from the side ● Collision from the rear 1 ● Vehicle rollover airbags) The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. ● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment ● Collision from the side at an angle The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. ● Collision from the front* ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover *: Depending on the conditions and type of accident, the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield 48 1-1. For safe use ■ When to contact your Lexus dealer In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. ● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. ● A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate. ● The pad section of the steering wheel, dash- board near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 49 Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger. 1 For safety and security 1 Seat belt reminder light 2 SRS warning light 3 “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light 4 “AIR BAG ON” indicator light ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 50 1-1. For safe use Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system ■ Adult*1 Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG ON” SRS warning light Off Seat belt reminder light Flashing*2 Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner ■ Child*3 or child restraint system*4 Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”*5 SRS warning light Off Seat belt reminder light Flashing*2 Front passenger airbag Deactivated Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 51 1-1. For safe use ■ Unoccupied Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Devices ■ Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Off 1 Deactivated Activated Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated There is a malfunction in the system Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” SRS warning light On Seat belt reminder light Off Front passenger airbag Deactivated Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Side airbag on the front passenger seat “AIR BAG OFF” 52 1-1. For safe use *1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. *4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 55) *5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 59) CAUTION ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. ● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision. ● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seat- back pockets or armrest). ● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. ● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. ● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 53 CAUTION ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions ● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This ● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu- minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. ● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 59) ● Do not modify or remove the front seats. ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat- backs. ● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1 For safety and security may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. 54 1-1. For safe use Safety information for children Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc. ● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. ● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc. CAUTION Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 55 Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat. ● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri- ate to the age and size of the child. ● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 59) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Points to remember 1 56 1-1. For safe use Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:   Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat  Forward facing  Convertible seat Booster seat ■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 32) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 57 CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior. the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. ● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of an accident. ● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. ● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security ● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to 1 58 1-1. For safe use CAUTION ■ When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■ When the child restraint system is not in use ● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment. ● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 59 Installing child restraints Child restraint LATCH anchors LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.) Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (P. 34) Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1 For safety and security Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint. The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system. 60 1-1. For safe use Installation with LATCH system 1 Lower the head restraint in place at the lowest position. 2 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.  Type A 3 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use  Type B 3 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. 61 1 Canada only ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. 62 1-1. For safe use Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) ■ Rear-facing  Infant seat/convertible seat 1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle. 2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. ■ Forward-facing Convertible seat 1 Lower the head restraint in place at the lowest position. 2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1 For safety and security After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 63 64 1-1. For safe use 3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. 5 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 6 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 66) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use ■ 65 Booster seat 1 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. 1 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 32) Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security 2 66 1-1. For safe use Child restraint systems with a top tether strap 1 Lower the head restraint in place at the lowest position. 2 Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or LATCH anchors. 3 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. ■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 67 CAUTION ■ When installing a booster seat To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 34) ■ When installing a child restraint system ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system. ● Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an accident. 1 68 1-1. For safe use CAUTION ■ When installing a child restraint system ● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi- tioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking. ● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. ● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac- turer. ■ Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or an accident. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 69 Exhaust gas precautions Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled. CAUTION ■ Important points while driving ● Keep the trunk lid closed. ● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ When parking ● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine . ● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. ● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running , exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. ■ Exhaust pipe The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 1 70 1-2. Hybrid system Hybrid system features (hybrid vehicles) Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care. The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions. 1 Gasoline engine 2 Electric motor (traction motor) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-2. Hybrid system 71 ◆ When stopped/during start off The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the electric motor (traction motor) is used. ◆ During normal driving ◆ When accelerating sharply When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor). ◆ When braking (regenerative braking) The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery). Vehicle proximity notification system When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary. 1 72 1-2. Hybrid system ■ Regenerative braking In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery). ● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D or S. ● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or S. ■ EV indicator The EV indicator comes on when driving the vehicle using only the electric motor (traction motor). ■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions: ● During gasoline engine warm-up ● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging ● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low ● When the heater is switched on ■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery) ● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer. ● If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or S to avoid discharging the battery. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery P. 811 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-2. Hybrid system 73 ■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicles There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when parked. ● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment. ● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops. ● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open. ● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid transmission when the hybrid system starts or stops. ● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply. ● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed. ● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops. ● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent on rear left seat. ■ Vehicle proximity notification system In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear. ● In very noisy areas ● In the wind or the rain Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the front. ■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction: 1 74 1-2. Hybrid system Hybrid system precautions (hybrid vehicles) Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle. 1 Air conditioning compressor 5 Service plug 2 Power control unit with DC/ DC converter 6 Electric motor (traction motor) 7 Caution label 3 High voltage cables (orange) 4 Hybrid battery (traction battery) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-2. Hybrid system 75 Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent Emergency shut off system When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer. Hybrid warning message A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (P. 761) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1 For safety and security There is an air intake vent beside the rear left seat for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery output. 76 1-2. Hybrid system ■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Running out of fuel When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (P. 754) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning light go out is about 3.0 gal. [11.3 L, 2.5 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.) ■ Electromagnetic waves ● High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances. ● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts. ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-2. Hybrid system 77 CAUTION ■ High voltage precautions The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. ● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or 1 ● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. For safety and security their connectors. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle. ● Never try to open the service plug access hole located behind the rear seats. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 78 1-2. Hybrid system CAUTION ■ Road accident cautions Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury: ● Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and turn the hybrid system off. ● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors. ● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires. ● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention. ● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicles, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous. ● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with front wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity leakage leading to a fire. (P. 743) ● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible. ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-2. Hybrid system 79 NOTICE ■ Hybrid battery air vent ● Do not put foreign objects near the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged. ● Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating. 1 ● Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vent as this may cause a ● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery). 80 1-3. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system (gasoline vehicles) The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator light flashes after the “START STOP ENGINE” switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the “START STOP ENGINE” switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-3. Theft deterrent system 81 ■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1  For vehicles sold in Canada CAUTION ■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTICE ■ To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 82 1-3. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system (hybrid vehicles) The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator light flashes after the “POWER” switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the “POWER” switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-3. Theft deterrent system 83 ■ Certifications for the immobilizer system  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1  For vehicles sold in Canada CAUTION ■ Certifications for the immobilizer system Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTICE ■ To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For safety and security Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 84 1-3. Theft deterrent system Alarm The alarm The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected. The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set: ● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.) ● The hood is opened. Setting the alarm system Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. Deactivating or stopping the alarm Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms: ● Unlock the doors or open the trunk. ● Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to ACCES- SORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine . (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 1-3. Theft deterrent system 85 ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system. ■ Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following: 1 ● Nobody is in the vehicle. ● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.) ● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood. ● The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (P. 807)  Gasoline vehicles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  Hybrid vehicles For safety and security ● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. 86 1-3. Theft deterrent system ■ Alarm-operated door lock ● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intrud- ers. ● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery. NOTICE ■ To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 87 Instrument cluster 2 2. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators ..............................88 Gauges and meters ..................... 93 Multi-information display ..........98 Energy monitor/ consumption screen ...............108 88 2. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated. ◆ Instrument cluster The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on the target region or grade/type. ◆ Center panel ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 89 ◆ Outside rear view mirrors (vehicles with BSM) 2 Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems. *1 Brake system warning light (P. 751) *1 (U.S.A.) *1 Brake system warning light (P. 751) Electric power steering system warning light (P. 753) *1 Slip indicator (P. 753) (Canada) *1 *1 Charging system warning light (P. 752) *1 Malfunction indicator lamp (P. 752) (U.S.A.) *1 (hybrid vehicles) *1 (if equipped) Brake system warning light (P. 753) Automatic headlight leveling system warning light (P. 753) Malfunction indicator lamp (P. 752) Open door warning light (P. 754) SRS warning light (P. 752) Low fuel level warning light (P. 754) (Canada) *1 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster Warning lights 90 2. Instrument cluster *1 ABS warning light (P. 752) Seat belt reminder light (P. 754) (U.S.A.) *1 ABS warning light (P. 752) *1 Master warning light (P. 754) (Canada) *1, 2 “PCS” warning light (P. 753, 764) *1 Tire pressure warning light (P. 755) (if equipped) *1: These lights turn on when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. *2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 91 Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. (U.S.A.) (if equipped) Cruise control “SET” indicator (P. 244, 248) Headlight indicator (P. 224) “LDA” (Lane Departure Alert) indicator (P. 264) Tail light indicator (P. 224) (if equipped) (if equipped) Headlight high beam indicator (P. 225) *1, 2 Automatic High Beam indicator (P. 228) *1 Front fog light indicator (P. 234) *1, 3 Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 271) Slip indicator (P. 299, 304) VSC OFF indicator (P. 304) “PCS” warning light (P. 307) (if equipped) (hybrid vehicles) “READY” indicator (P. 204) *4 (if equipped) BSM outside rear view mirror indicators (P. 313) *1 (hybrid vehicles) EV indicator (P. 72) (gasoline vehicles) Cruise control indicator (P. 244, 248) (if equipped) Radar cruise control indicator (P. 248) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Eco Driving Indicator Light (P. 105) *1 “AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator (P. 49) 2 Instrument cluster (Canada) Turn signal indicator (P. 221) 92 2. Instrument cluster *1: These lights turn on when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. *2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating. *3: The light turns on when the system is turned off. The light flashes quickly to indicate that the system is operating. * : In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illumi4 nate in the following situations: • When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON. • When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds. If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine , this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 93 Gauges and meters 2 1 Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature 2 Tachometer/Hybrid System Indicator  Tachometer Gasoline vehicles, or hybrid vehicles with sport mode selected (P. 296) Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute  Hybrid System Indicator Hybrid vehicles with other than sport mode selected (P. 296) Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (P. 96) 3 ECO lamp and SPORT lamp Changes colors according to driving mode (P. 97) 4 Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 98) 5 Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region. 94 2. Instrument cluster 6 Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank 7 Shift position and shift range Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 214, 217) 8 Odometer and trip meter display  Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven  Trip meter Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently. Changing the display Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the button will reset the trip meter. Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. 1 Darker 2 Brighter ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 95 ■ The meters and display illuminate when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once. 2 ■ Limitation of brightness adjustment ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted based on the light sensor detecting how bright the surroundings are. However, if the instrument panel brightness has been manually set to either the brightest or darkest setting, the automatic adjustment will not be performed. 96 2. Instrument cluster ■ Hybrid System Indicator (hybrid vehicles) 1 Power area Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.) 2 Eco area Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner. 3 Hybrid Eco area Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often. The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions. 4 Charge area Shows regenerative charging. ● Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when the driving mode is other than the sport mode. ● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved. ● Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the battery. *: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 97 ■ ECO lamp and SPORT lamp ● When sport mode is selected, SPORT lamp (red) will illuminate. ● When all of the following conditions are satisfied and Eco-friendly driving, ECO lamp (blue) will illuminate. (ECO lamp will become brighter the more Eco-friendly driving you perform. Also, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, ECO lamp turns off. (P. 105) However, when Eco drive mode is selected, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, ECO lamp does not turn off.): • Driving with the shift lever in D • Either normal mode or Eco drive mode is selected. • The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or below. Hybrid System Indicator automatically switches to the tachometer when driving mode is in sport mode. ■ Engine speed (hybrid vehicles) Engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same. ■ Odometer and trip meter display P. 201, 209 ■ Customization Settings (e.g. on/off operation of ECO lamp) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 852) NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components ● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi- cates the maximum engine speed. ● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 813, 816) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster ■ Tachometer (hybrid vehicles) 2 98 2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display Display contents The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature. ● Eco Driving Indicator Zone Dis- play (gasoline vehicles) (P. 105) ● Energy monitor (hybrid vehicles) (P. 108) ● Outside temperature display (P. 99) ● Trip information (P. 99) Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information ● Tire inflation pressure (P. 703) ● Drive monitor (P. 102) ● Intuitive parking assist display* (if equipped) (P. 273) ● Dynamic radar cruise control display* (if equipped) (P. 248) ● LDA (Lane Departure Alert) display* (if equipped) (P. 265) ● Warning messages (P. 761) Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. Display can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button. (P. 99) *: Automatically displayed when the system is used. Display can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button. (P. 99) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 99 Trip information ■ Switching the display Items displayed can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button. 2 Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (gasoline vehicles) P. 105 ■ Energy monitor (hybrid vehicles) P. 108 ■ Outside temperature Displays the outside air temperature The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C) ■ Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster ■ 100 ■ 2. Instrument cluster Average fuel consumption after refueling Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset • The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than 1 second when the average fuel consumption is displayed. • Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster ■ 101 Driving range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining ■ Elapsed time Displays the elapsed time since the engine was started ■ Tire inflation pressure Displays inflation pressure of each tire For the vehicles with a full-size spare tire: The inflation pressure of the spare tire will be displayed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2 Instrument cluster • This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off, the display may not be updated. 102 2. Instrument cluster Drive monitor Outside temperature, average fuel consumption after refueling or driving range can be selected and displayed. If displayed on the drive monitor, other trip information or warning messages can be displayed simultaneously. For display and selection procedures, follow the “Setting up the displays”. The information displayed on the drive monitor will not be displayed on the trip information screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 103 Setting up the displays 1 While the vehicle is stopped, press the “DISP” button until the “Settings” screen appears. 2 2 Vehicles without Lexus Display Audio system or a navigation system: Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the desired setting item (“Meter”, “Vehicle” or “Ambient illumin.” [if equipped]) by pressing the “DISP” button. 3 Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the desired setting item by pressing the “DISP” button. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster Press and hold the “DISP” button until the screen changes. 104 4 2. Instrument cluster Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the desired setting by pressing the “DISP” button. The display goes back to step 5 3 . Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the “EXIT” by pressing the “DISP” button. The display goes back to step 1 . (The display goes back to step 1 automatically in few seconds without proceeding step 5 .) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 105 ■ System check display After turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode, “SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. ■ Eco Driving Indicator (gasoline vehicles) Suggests Zone of Eco driving and Eco driving ratio based on acceleration. 1 Eco Driving Indicator Light Eco Driving Indicator Light availability can be customized. The default setting is off. (P. 852) When the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off. 2 Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display 3 Zone of Eco driving 4 Eco driving ratio based on acceleration If the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, the right side of Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display blinks. Eco Driving Indicator will not operate in the following conditions: ● The shift lever is anything other than D. ● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (P. 296) ● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher. ■ Outside temperature display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change. ● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) ● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on. 2 106 2. Instrument cluster ■ Setting display automatic cancelation In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be changed through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off. ● When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed ● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed ■ Tire inflation pressure ● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted. ● “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions. ● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge. ■ Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display. ■ Customization Setting of available languages can be changed. (Customizable features P. 852) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 107 CAUTION ■ The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury. ■ Cautions during setting up the display NOTICE ■ During setting up the display To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 2 108 2. Instrument cluster Energy monitor/consumption screen You can view the status of your vehicle on the multi-information display and the navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen. 1 Navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen (if equipped) 2 Multi-information display ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 109 Remote Touch/Lexus Display Audio controller (if equipped)  Navigation system Remote Touch* 1 “MENU” button 2 Remote Touch knob *: For use of the Remote Touch, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Lexus Display Audio system Lexus Display Audio controller (P. 334) 1 “MENU” button Displaying the “MENU” screen 2 Lexus Display Audio controller Turn or move the controller in the four direction to select a function, number and screen button. Push the controller to enter the selected function, number and screen button. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster  2 110 2. Instrument cluster Energy monitor (hybrid vehicles) ■ Navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen (if equipped)  Vehicles with a navigation system 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen. If the “Energy Monitor” screen is not displayed, select “Energy”.  Vehicles with Lexus Display Audio system 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. 2 Select “Car” on the “Menu” screen. If the “Energy Monitor” screen is not displayed, select “Energy”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster ■ 111 Multi-information display Press the “DISP” button on the steering wheel several times to select the energy monitor display. 2 Instrument cluster ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 112 2. Instrument cluster Navigation system screen/Lexus Display Audio system screen  Navigation system When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)  Lexus Display Audio system  Navigation system When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)  Lexus Display Audio system  Navigation system When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  Lexus Display Audio system Multi-information display 2. Instrument cluster Navigation system screen/Lexus Display Audio system screen 113 Multi-information display  Navigation system  Lexus Display Audio system  Navigation system  Lexus Display Audio system  Navigation system When there is no energy flow ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  Lexus Display Audio system Instrument cluster When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery) 2 114 2. Instrument cluster Navigation system screen/Lexus Display Audio system screen Multi-information display  Navigation system Low Hybrid battery (traction battery) status Full Low Full  Lexus Display Audio system These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster 115 Consumption (if equipped)  Vehicles with a navigation system 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/ Apps” on the “Menu” screen. 2 Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen. Hybrid vehicles: If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.  2 Vehicles with Lexus Display Audio system Hybrid vehicles: If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then select “Car” on the “Menu” screen. 116 ■ 2. Instrument cluster Trip information If the “Trip Information” screen is not displayed, select “Trip Information”.  Navigation system 1 Current fuel consumption 2 Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes 3 Hybrid vehicles: Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes  Lexus Display Audio system One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown. 4 Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started. 5 Displays the elapsed time since the engine was started. 6 Cruising range (P. 118) 7 Reset the consumption data 8 “Past Record” (Navigation system) or “History” (Lexus Display Audio system) screen appears 9 Hybrid vehicles: “Energy Monitor” screen appears Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2. Instrument cluster ■ 117 Past record If the “History” or “Past Record” screen is not displayed, select “History” or “Past Record”.  Navigation system  Lexus Display Audio system 2 Average fuel consumption 2 Previous fuel consumption record 3 Best recorded fuel consumption 4 Update the average fuel consumption data 5 Reset the past record data 6 “Trip Information” screen appears 7 Hybrid vehicles: “Energy Monitor” screen appears The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Instrument cluster 1 118 2. Instrument cluster ■ Updating the past record data Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again. ■ Resetting the data The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”. ■ Cruising range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 119 Operation of each component 3 3-1. Key information Keys .................................................. 120 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start ............ 123 Wireless remote control .......... 136 Doors ............................................... 139 Trunk..................................................144 3-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats........................................151 Driving position memory......... 153 Head restraints ............................ 159 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel ..............................162 Inside rear view mirror.............. 164 Outside rear view mirrors........167 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Power windows.............................170 Moon roof.......................................173 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 120 3-1. Key information Keys The keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. 1 Electronic keys • Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 123) • Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 136) 2 Mechanical keys 3 Key number plate Using the mechanical key To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out. The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 802) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-1. Key information 121 ■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 145, 608) Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. ■ If you lose your mechanical keys New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. ■ When riding in an aircraft ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft. 122 3-1. Key information NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage ● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. ● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time. ● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. ● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. ● Do not disassemble the keys. ● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key. ● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment. ■ Carrying the electronic key on your person Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly. ■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key- related problems Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. ■ When an electronic key is lost If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 123 Smart access system with push-button start Function summary The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.) Hybrid vehicles Gasoline vehicles 3 Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 124) 2 Opens the trunk (P. 124) 3 Starts the engine (P. 197) Starts the hybrid system (P. 204) ■ Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice) ■ Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. ■ Welcome light illumination control The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in the “AUTO” position. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component 1 124 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Unlocking and locking the doors Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.* Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked. *: The door unlock settings can be changed. (P. 128) Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors. Opening the trunk Press the button. If the vehicle is equipped with power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 125 Antenna location and effective range ■ Antenna location 1 Antennas outside the cabin 2 Antennas inside the cabin 3 Antenna outside the trunk 34 Antenna inside the trunk 3 Operation of each component ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 126 ■ 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) When opening the trunk The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button. When starting the engine or changing “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle. ■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle If the door will not lock even when the topside sensor area is touched, try touching both the topside and underside sensor areas at the same time. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 127 ■ Alarms and warning indicators An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (P. 761) When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows. Alarm Situation Correction procedure The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver’s door Interior alarm sounds was open (or the driver’s continuously door was opened while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was in ACCESSORY mode). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off and close the driver’s door. 3 Operation of each component The trunk was closed while the electronic key Retrieve the electronic was still inside the trunk key from the trunk and Exterior alarm sounds and all the doors were close the trunk lid. locked. once for 5 seconds An attempt was made to Close all of the doors and lock the vehicle while a lock the doors again. door was open. 128 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Switching the door unlock function It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control. 1 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding , . The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2 .) Multi-information display Unlocking function Beep Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s Exterior: Beeps 3 times door. Interior: Pings once Holding a passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors. Holding a door handle unlocks Exterior: Beeps twice all the doors. Interior: Pings once To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 84) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 129 ■ Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. ● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take some time to unlock the doors. • The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer. • The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer. ● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors. When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves. Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times. While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart access system with push-button start cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component ■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function 3 130 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Conditions affecting operation The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 802) ● When the electronic key battery is depleted ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, air- port or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device ● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby ● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves • Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) • Digital audio players • Portable game systems ● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 131 ■ Note for the entry function ● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases: • The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened. • The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch modes are changed. ● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle. or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle. ● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window. ● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door han- dle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component ● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked 3 132 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Note for locking the doors ● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again. ● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle: • Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) • Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 129) ● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors. ● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle. ● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door. ■ Note for the unlocking function ● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. ● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. ● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle: • Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) • Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 129) ● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped. ● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 133 ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods ● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance. (P. 852) ■ Alarm Using the smart access system with push-button start to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 84) ■ To operate the system properly ● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. ● Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment. The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (P. 146) ■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly ● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key. (P. 802) ● Starting the engine : P. 803 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.) 134 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Electronic key battery depletion ● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. ● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops. (P. 781) ● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 710) • The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate. • The detection area becomes smaller. • The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on. ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field: • • • • • • TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Table lamps Induction cookers ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 710 ■ Customization Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) ■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus- tomized setting ● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 136, 802) ● Starting the engine and changing “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch modes: P. 803 ● Stopping the engine : (P. 198, 205) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 135 ■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-8 FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3 FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3 NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 125) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. ● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component  For vehicles sold in Canada 3 136 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Wireless remote control Function summary The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. 1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks all the doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors. 3 Opens the windows and moon roof (press and hold)* 4 Opens the trunk (press and hold) If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully. 5 Sounds the alarm (press and hold) (P. 137) *: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 137 ■ Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice) Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened. Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating. ■ Welcome light illumination control P. 123 ■ Door lock buzzer ■ Panic mode When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key. ■ Security feature P. 123 ■ Alarm Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 84) ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 130 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. 138 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key. (P. 802) ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 134 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 710 ■ Confirmation of the registered key number The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) ■ Certification for wireless remote control  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 139 Doors Unlocking and locking the doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switches. ◆ Entry function P. 123 ◆ Wireless remote control P. 136 1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks all the doors ◆ Inside lock buttons 1 Locks the door 2 Unlocks the door The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component ◆ Door lock switches 3 140 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Locking the front doors from the outside without a key 1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position. 2 Close the door. The door cannot be locked if the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. 1 Unlock 2 Lock These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 141 Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or canceled: Function Operation Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors. Shift position linked door unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors. Speed linked door locking function All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. Driver’s door linked door unlocking function All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is opened within 45 seconds after turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. ■ Setting and canceling the functions To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below: 1 Close all the doors and turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.) 2 Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver’s door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then release. The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows. Use the same procedure to cancel the function. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component Shift position linked door locking function 142 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Function Shift lever position Shift position linked door locking function Shift position linked door unlocking function Speed linked door locking function Driver’s door linked door unlocking function Driver’s door lock switch position P N When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked. ■ Impact detection door lock release system In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Using the mechanical key The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 802) ■ If a wrong key is used The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 143 CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked. ● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position. ● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats. 3 Operation of each component ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 144 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Trunk The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control. If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk can be closed using the trunk closer. Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle Press the opener switch. If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully. Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle ■ Entry function P. 123 ■ Wireless remote control P. 136 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 145 Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) Pressing the switch closes the trunk lid automatically. (A buzzer sounds.) Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is closing opens the trunk lid again. When closing the trunk Luggage security system The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft. Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener. 1 On 2 Off The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk without applying force to the side and push the trunk down from the outside to close it. 146 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Trunk light The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened. ■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. ■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside ● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid. ● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle. ● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk. ● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener. ■ Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk lid. ■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down. ■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if something gets caught. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 147 ■ Internal trunk release lever The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid to the side. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed. ■ Using the mechanical key The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 803) ■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant P. 121 Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Before driving ● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident. ● Do not allow children to enter the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate. ● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid. ■ Important points while driving Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component CAUTION 3 148 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Using the trunk Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened. ● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur- rounding area is safe. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close. ● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind. ● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk. ● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught. ● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught. ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after it is opened. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 149 CAUTION ■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the trunk easy closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries. ■ Power trunk opener and closer (if equipped) ● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close. ● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the trunk lid may open or close suddenly. ● On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk. ● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident. • When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle • When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode or the engine is started during automatic operation ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and closer. Failure to do so may cause serious injury. 150 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause serious injury. ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func- tion. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid. ● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else. NOTICE ■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating. ■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer) ● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the trunk lid may cause a malfunction. ● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and closer is operating. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats 151 Front seats Adjustment procedure 3 Seat position adjustment switch 4 2 Seatback switch Vertical switch 5 Lumbar support adjustment switch 3 angle adjustment height adjustment Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch 6 Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component 1 152 3-3. Adjusting the seats ■ Power easy access system The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 156) CAUTION ■ When adjusting the seat position ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. ■ Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ■ When adjusting the seat positions Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats 153 Driving position memory Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled by pressing a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked. Three different driving positions can be entered into memory. The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized (if equipped). 3 Entering a position to memory Check that the shift lever is in P. 2 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode. 3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. (When memorizing the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired positions.) 4 While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after the “SET” button is pressed, press button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component 1 154 3-3. Adjusting the seats Recalling the memorized position 1 Check that the shift lever is in P. 2 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode. 3 Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the desired position. ■ When you want to stop the position recall operation part-way through Perform any of the following operations: ● Press the “SET” button. ● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall). ■ The adjusted positions that can be memorized The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumber support switch can be memorized. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats 155 Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation (driver’s side only) A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of the door. ■ Setting procedure Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following: Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift the shift lever to P and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly. Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode and recall the position which you want to link. 2 While pressing the button to recall the position, press the driver’s door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps. The driving position is recalled when the driver’s door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component 1 3 156 3-3. Adjusting the seats ■ Cancelation procedure Carry only the key for which you want to cancel the linked door unlock operation. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly. 1 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode and close the driver’s door. 2 While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps. Power easy access system The auto away/return function enables easy access by activating when the driver attempts to enter or exit the vehicle. ■ Auto away function when exiting the vehicle When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver and the seat will move backward: • The shift lever has been shifted to P. • The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch has been turned off. • The driver seat belt has been unfastened. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats ■ 157 Auto return function when entering the vehicle When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward: • The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode. • The driver’s seat belt has been fastened. ■ When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation ■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off Driver’s seat: Memorized seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Memorized steering wheel position can be activated by pressing the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch. Front passenger’s seat: Memorized positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s door is opened by pressing button “1”, “2” or “3”. ■ Correct seat position When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled. ■ The auto away function for exiting the driver’s seat If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not operate when the driver exits the vehicle. ■ Customization The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle. Turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or fastening the driver’s seat belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position. 158 3-3. Adjusting the seats CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats 159 Head restraints Head restraints are provided for all seats. Front seats Vertical adjustment 1 Up Pull the head restraints up. 2 Down Angle adjustment The position of the head restraint can be adjusted forward in 4 stages. If the head restraint is pulled forward from the foremost position, it will return to the rearmost position. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Lock release button Operation of each component Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button. 160 3-3. Adjusting the seats Rear seats 1 Up Pull the head restraints up. 2 Down Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button. Lock release button ■ Removing the head restraints Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button. Lock release button ■ Installing the head restraints  Front seats Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. Lock release button  Rear seats Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button. Lock release button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats 161 ■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. ■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. CAUTION Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. ● Do not drive with the head restraints removed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component ■ Head restraint precautions 3 162 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel Adjustment procedure  Manual adjustment 1 Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever down. 2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically. After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.  Power adjustment Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions: 1 Up 2 Down 3 Toward the driver 4 Away from the driver ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 163 ■ The power adjustment type steering wheel can be adjusted when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode*. *: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode. ■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (power adjustment type) A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (P. 153) ■ Power easy access system (power adjustment type) The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 156) ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual adjustment type) Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component CAUTION 3 164 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Inside rear view mirror The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view. Adjusting the height of rear view mirror The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture. Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 165 Anti-glare function Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.  Without compass Changing automatic function mode 1 ON 2 OFF anti-glare  Indicator With compass Turning automatic anti-glare function mode on/off When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates. The function will set to ON mode each time the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates. The function will set to ON mode each time the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.) Indicator 166 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors ■ To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them. CAUTION Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 167 Outside rear view mirrors Adjustment procedure 1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch. 1 Left 2 Right 3 2 1 Up 2 Right 3 Down 4 Left Folding the mirrors Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component To adjust the mirror, press the switch. 168 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors ■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. ■ Linked mirror function when reversing ● When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither “L” nor “R”. ● If the mirror angle adjustment switch is operated while the linked mirror function is in operation, the angle and position of the mirrors can be remembered, and the mirrors will operate at the angle adjusted to the last time the linked mirror function was operated. However, because the mirrors move based on the angle they are in when the linked mirror function is not operating, the mirror angle when the linked mirror function is operating will also be changed if the mirrors are adjusted while the function is not operating. ■ When the mirrors are fogged up The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 372) ■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (P. 153) ■ Auto anti-glare function When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 165) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 169 CAUTION ■ Important points while driving Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded. ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. ■ When a mirror is moving To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror. Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component ■ When the mirror defoggers are operating 3 170 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Power windows Opening and closing procedures The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows: 1 Closing 2 One-touch closing* 3 Opening 4 One-touch opening* *: Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway. Window lock switch Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof 171 ■ The power windows can be operated when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. ■ When the power window does not close normally ● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. ● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure. 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed. 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely. 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed. If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 Operation of each component If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door. 172 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof ■ Door lock linked window operation ● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 802) ● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 136) *: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the battery. ■ Power windows open warning buzzer The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Closing the windows ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. ■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func- tion. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof 173 Moon roof Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down. Opening and closing  Standard type 1 Opens the moon roof* The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise. 2 Closes the moon roof* *: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.  Glass type 1 Opens the moon roof 2 Closes the moon roof (push and hold)* *: The moon roof stops once. Push and hold the switch again to fully close. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof. 3 174 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Tilting up and down  Standard type 1 Tilts the moon roof up* 2 Tilts the moon roof down* *: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.  Glass type 1 Tilts the moon roof up* 2 Tilts the moon roof down (push and hold) *: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof 175 ■ The moon roof can be operated when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. ■ Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. ● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 802) ● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 136) *: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component ■ Door lock linked moon roof operation 3 176 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof ■ When the moon roof does not close normally Perform the following procedure: ● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1 The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close. 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. ● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops. 3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1 The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close. 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. *1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning. * : If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic 2 operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof 177 ■ Moon roof open warning buzzer The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open. ■ Customization Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■ Opening the moon roof 3 ● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while ● Do not sit on top of the moon roof. ■ Closing the moon roof ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. ■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func- tion. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Operation of each component it is moving. 178 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 179 Driving 4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle......................180 Cargo and luggage..................... 191 Vehicle load limits ....................... 194 Trailer towing.................................195 Dinghy towing............................... 196 4-2. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch (gasoline vehicles) ....................197 Power (ignition) switch (hybrid vehicles) ......................204 EV drive mode (hybrid vehicles) .........................211 Automatic transmission (gasoline vehicles) ................... 214 Hybrid transmission (hybrid vehicles) ....................... 217 Turn signal lever ........................... 221 Parking brake...............................222 Horn.................................................223 4 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch......................... 224 Automatic High Beam.............228 Fog light switch ...........................234 Windshield wipers and washer.................................235 4-4. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap .....239 4-5. Using the driving support systems Cruise control ............................. 244 Dynamic radar cruise control............................248 LDA (Lane Departure Alert)........ 263 Intuitive parking assist ................271 Rear view monitor system .....284 Driving mode select switch ........................................... 296 Driving assist systems...............298 Hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles) ......................304 PCS (Pre-Collision System)..........306 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)...... 313 • Blind Spot Monitor function ......................................317 • Rear Cross Traffic Alert function ....................................320 4-6. Driving tips Hybrid vehicle driving tips (hybrid vehicles) .....................323 Winter driving tips ..................... 326 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 180 4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving: Starting the engine P. 197, 204 Driving 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 214, 217) 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 222) 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. Stopping 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. Gasoline vehicles: If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (P. 214) Hybrid vehicles: If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. (P. 217) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 181 Parking the vehicle 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 214, 217) 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 222) 4 Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to stop the engine . 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person. If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed. Starting off on a steep uphill Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D. 2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal. 3 Release the parking brake. ■ When starting off on a uphill (hybrid vehicles) The hill-start assist control is available. (P. 304) ■ Driving in the rain ● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. ● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. ■ Engine speed while driving In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. ● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill ● When the accelerator pedal is released ● When sport mode is selected (P. 296) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving 1 182 4-1. Before driving ■ Breaking in your new Lexus To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended: ● For the first 186 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. ● For the first 621 miles (1000 km): • • • • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. ■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation. ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 837) ■ For efficient use (hybrid vehicles) ● Shift the shift lever to D when driving. In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge. ● Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power. ● Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released. ● Shift the shift lever to P when parking. In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge. Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 183 ■ Eco-friendly driving Gasoline vehicles: P. 105 Hybrid vehicles: P. 96 ■ Customization (gasoline vehicles) Setting of Eco Driving Indicator Light can be changed. (Customizable features P. 852) CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When starting the vehicle Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running . This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ■ When driving the vehicle 4 ● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ● Hybrid vehicles only: When the hybrid vehicles are driven using the electric motor only, no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not realize that the vehicle is approaching. Even with the vehicle proximity notification system active, people may not realize the vehicle is approaching when the surrounding area is noisy and so forth. Therefore, take extra care while driving. ● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. 184 4-1. Before driving CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When driving the vehicle ● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine . Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 741 ● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 215, 218) ● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 185 CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle. ● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to, resulting in an accident. ● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected. ■ When shifting the shift lever ● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or ● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Gasoline vehicles: Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will dis- engage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected. Hybrid vehicles: Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected. ● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shift- ing the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Gasoline vehicles: Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. Hybrid vehicles: Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle. 186 4-1. Before driving CAUTION ■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. ■ When the vehicle is stopped ● Gasoline vehicles: Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident. Hybrid vehicles: Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident. ● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running , and apply the parking brake as necessary. ● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed. ● Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 187 CAUTION ■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi- cle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following: • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components. ● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. ● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain- 4 ● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal- Driving ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle. lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire. ● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running . ● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 188 4-1. Before driving CAUTION ■ When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. ■ When braking ● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. ● If the brake booster (gasoline vehicles) or brake actuator (hybrid vehicles) does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. ● Gasoline vehicles only: Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. ● Gasoline vehicles: The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. If this happens, do not drive the vehicle. Have your brakes fixed immediately. Hybrid vehicles: The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake system warning light (red indicator) comes on together with the buzzer sound while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 189 NOTICE ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque. ● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill. ■ When parking the vehicle Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor. 4 ● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag■ If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations. ● The vehicle will lean abnormally. Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 784) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. 190 4-1. Before driving NOTICE ■ When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle: ● Engine stalling ● Short in electrical components ● Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following: ● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, fluid used for automatic transaxle , etc. ● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 191 Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load: Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P. 194) Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 192 4-1. Before driving Calculation formula for your vehicle 1 Cargo capacity 2 Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (P. 824) When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows: B*2 lb. (kg) — A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg) *1: A = Weight of people *2: B = Total load capacity *3: C = Available cargo and luggage load In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows: C lb. (kg) — D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg) *4: D = Additional weight of people *5: E = Available cargo and luggage load As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 193 CAUTION ■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk: ● Receptacles containing gasoline ● Aerosol cans ■ Storage precautions Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident. ● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. ● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations. At the feet of the driver On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) On the package tray On the instrument panel On the dashboard In front of the navigation system screen, Lexus Display Audio system screen or the audio/air conditioning system display ● Secure all items in the occupant compartment. ■ Capacity and distribution ● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving • • • • • • 194 4-1. Before driving Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. ◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): P. 824 Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. ◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. ◆ Towing capacity Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. ◆ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. ■ Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 703) CAUTION ■ Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 195 Trailer towing Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 196 4-1. Before driving Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 197 Engine (ignition) switch (gasoline vehicles) Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes “START STOP ENGINE” switch modes. Starting the engine 1 Check that the parking brake is set. 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P. 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal. will be displayed on the multi-information display. 4 If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started. Press the “START ENGINE” switch. STOP The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started. The engine can be started from any “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving 4 198 4-2. Driving procedures Stopping the engine 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 222) 4 Press the “START STOP ENGINE” switch. 5 Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multiinformation display is off. Changing “START STOP ENGINE” switch modes Modes can be changed by pressing the “START STOP ENGINE” switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) Off* The emergency flashers can be used. The multi-information display will not be displayed. ACCESSORY mode Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. “POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display. IGNITION ON mode All electrical components can be used. “POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display. *: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the “START STOP ENGINE” switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 199 When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the “START STOP ENGINE” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off: 1 Check that the parking brake is set. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and then press the “START STOP ENGINE” switch once. 4 Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display are off. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 200 4-2. Driving procedures ■ Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “START STOP ENGINE” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running. ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 134 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 130 ■ Notes for the entry function P. 131 ■ If the engine does not start ● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 80) Contact your Lexus dealer. ● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position to Start” will be displayed on the multiinformation display. ■ Steering lock After turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the “START STOP ENGINE” switch again automatically cancels the steering lock. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 201 ■ When the steering lock cannot be released “Steering Lock active” will be displayed on the multi-information display. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the “START STOP ENGINE” switch while turning the steering wheel left and right. ■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning. ■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” is displayed on the multi-information display ■ If the electronic key battery is depleted P. 710 ■ Operation of the “START STOP ENGINE” switch ● When operating the “START STOP ENGINE” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. ● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine. ■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus- tomized setting P. 802 ■ Odometer and trip meter display When the “START STOP ENGINE” switch is turned off, the odometer or trip meter display will extinguish after approximately 30 seconds. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. 202 4-2. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Caution while driving If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Stopping the engine in an emergency If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the “START STOP ENGINE” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 741) However, do not touch the “START STOP ENGINE” switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 203 NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Do not leave the “START STOP ENGINE” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI- TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running. ● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the “START STOP ENGINE” switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off. ● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the “START STOP ENGINE” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur. ■ When starting the engine ● Do not race a cold engine. ● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer immediately. If the “START STOP ENGINE” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch 4 204 4-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch (hybrid vehicles) Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER” switch modes. Starting the hybrid system 1 Check that the parking brake is set. 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P. 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal. will be displayed on the multi-information display. If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started. 4 Press the “POWER” switch. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the hybrid system is completely started. The hybrid system can be started from any “POWER” switch mode. 5 Check that the “READY” indicator is on. The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 205 Stopping the hybrid system 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 222) 4 Press the “POWER” switch. 5 Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multiinformation display is off. Changing “POWER” switch modes Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) Off* The multi-information display will not be displayed. ACCESSORY mode Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. “POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display. ON mode All electrical components can be used. “POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display. *: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the “POWER” switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving The emergency flashers can be used. 4 206 4-2. Driving procedures When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off: 1 Check that the parking brake is set. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and then press the “POWER” switch once. 4 Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display are off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 207 ■ Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “POWER” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicles P. 73 ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 134 ■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on. ■ Conditions affecting operation 4 P. 130 P. 131 ■ If the hybrid system does not start ● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 82) Contact your Lexus dealer. ● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position when starting” will be displayed on the multi-information display. ■ Steering lock After turning the “POWER” switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the “POWER” switch again automatically cancels the steering lock. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ■ Notes for the entry function 208 4-2. Driving procedures ■ When the steering lock cannot be released “Steering Lock active” will be displayed on the multi-information display. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the “POWER” switch while turning the steering wheel left and right. ■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning. ■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER” switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning P. 762 ■ If the electronic key battery is depleted P. 710 ■ Operation of the “POWER” switch ● When operating the “POWER” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the “POWER” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. ● If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the “POWER” switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the “POWER” switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system. ■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus- tomized setting P. 802 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 209 ■ Odometer and trip meter display When the “POWER” switch is turned off, the odometer or trip meter display will extinguish after approximately 30 seconds. CAUTION ■ When starting the hybrid system Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Caution while driving If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency However, do not touch the “POWER” switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 741) 4 210 4-2. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long peri- ods of time without the hybrid system on. ● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the “POWER” switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the “POWER” switch off. ● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur. ■ When starting the hybrid system ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. ● If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “POWER” switch If the “POWER” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 211 EV drive mode (hybrid vehicles) In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle. This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emissions. However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the vehicle may produce sound. Turns EV drive mode on/off ■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. ● The temperature of the hybrid system is high. The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc. ● The temperature of the hybrid system is low. The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68F (20C) for a long period of time etc. ● The gasoline engine is warming up. ● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” screen or the multiinformation display is low. (P. 110) ● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly. ● The windshield defogger is in use. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving When EV drive mode is turned on, “EV MODE” will be displayed on the multi-information display. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). 212 4-2. Driving procedures ■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode. After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode. ■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV indicator will flash 3 times and go off. ● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low. The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” screen or the multiinformation display is low. (P. 110) ● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h). ● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly. When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior notice screen will appear on the multi-information display. ■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 1.3 mile (2 km). Driving is possible at speeds of less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used. (The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.) ■ Fuel economy Your Lexus is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 213 CAUTION ■ Caution while driving When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 214 4-2. Driving procedures Automatic transmission (gasoline vehicles) Shifting the shift lever While the “START STOP ENGINE” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped. Shift position purpose Shift position Objective or function P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine R Reversing N Neutral D Normal driving*1 S S mode driving*2 (P. 215) *1: Shifting the shift lever to D allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to D is recommended for normal driving. *2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents unnecessary upshifting. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 215 Selecting gears in the S position When the shift lever is in S, the shift lever can be operated as follows: 1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting The selected shift range, from S1 to S6, will be displayed in the meter. The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to S5 or S4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to S3 if AISHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in D. (P. 216) 4 Driving ■ Shift ranges and their functions ● Automatically selecting gears between S1 and S6 according to vehi- cle speed and driving conditions. But the gear is limited according to selected shift range. ● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force. ● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 216 4-2. Driving procedures ■ S mode ● When the shift range is S4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to S6. ● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur. ● To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically shifts to the top range when the temperature is too hot. ■ When driving with cruise control activated Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting to 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 244) ■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.) ■ If the S indicator does not come on or the D indicator is displayed even after shift- ing the shift lever to S This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.) ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 801 ■ AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift lever to S cancels the function.) CAUTION ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly. Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 217 Hybrid transmission (hybrid vehicles) Shifting the shift lever 4 When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped. Shift position purpose Shift position Objective or function P Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system R Reversing N Neutral D Normal driving*1 S S mode driving*2 (P. 218) *1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal driving. *2: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control engine braking forces. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving While the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed. 218 4-2. Driving procedures Selecting shift ranges in the S position To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can then be selected by operating the shift lever, allowing you to drive in the shift range of your choosing. 1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting The selected shift range, from S1 to S6, will be displayed in the meter. The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to S4 or S5 according to vehicle speed. ■ Shift ranges and their functions ● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force. ● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase. ● If you accelerate while in ranges S1 to S4, the shift range may auto- matically range up in accordance with the vehicle’s speed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 219 ■ S mode ● When the shift range is S4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to S6. ● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur. ■ When driving with cruise control activated Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting to S5 or S4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 244) ■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.) ■ If the S indicator does not come on or the D indicator is displayed even after shift- ing the shift lever to S ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 801 ■ AI-SHIFT AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions. AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.) 220 4-2. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly. Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident. NOTICE ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 221 Turn signal lever Operating instructions 1 Right turn 2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and then release it) The right hand signals will flash 3 times. 3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and then release it) The left hand signals will flash 3 times. 4 4 Left turn Driving ■ Turn signals can be operated when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. ■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed Operate the lever again. ■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change Operate the lever in the opposite direction. ■ Customization The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed. (P. 852) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 222 4-2. Driving procedures Parking brake To set the parking brake, fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot. (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.) U.S.A. Canada ■ Usage in winter time P. 327 NOTICE ■ Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 223 Horn To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark. ■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual adjustment type only) Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (P. 162) 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 224 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. Operating instructions Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows: The side marker, daytime running, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. 1 2 The headlights, parking and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. 3 The headlights, daytime running lights and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode.) 4 Off (U.S.A.) (Canada) The daytime running lights turn on. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) U.S.A. Canada 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 225 Turning on the high beam headlights 1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams. Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off. 2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 226 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers ■ Daytime running light system ● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the parking lights turn on auto- matically (at an increased intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch. ● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy. ■ Headlight control sensor The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. ■ Automatic light off system When the light switch is in : The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.) To turn the lights on again, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or . If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes. ■ Light reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on. ■ Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped) The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 227 ■ Customization Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running . 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 228 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Automatic High Beam The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary. Activating the Automatic High Beam system 1 Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in or position. 2 Press the Automatic High Beam switch. The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 229 High beam automatic turning on or off conditions When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second): ● Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h). ● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark. ● There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail lights turned on. ● There are few streetlights on the road ahead. If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off: ● Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h). ● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark. on. ● There are many streetlights on the road ahead. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned 4 230 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Turning the high beam on/off manually ■ Switching to low beam Pull the lever to original position. The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off. Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again. ■ Switching to high beam Press the Automatic High Beam switch. The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on. Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 231 ■ The Automatic High Beam can be operated when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Camera sensor detection information ● High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations: • When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve • When the vehicle is cut in front of by another • When oncoming or preceding vehicles are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees • When oncoming vehicles appear from the faraway lane on wide road • When oncoming or preceding vehicles have no lights ● High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected. ● House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to turn off. 4 ● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on or • The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles • The movement and direction of oncoming and preceding vehicles • When a oncoming or preceding vehicle only has operational lights on one side • When a oncoming or preceding vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle • The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.) • The number of passengers and amount of luggage ● High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving off: 232 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers ● In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the sur- rounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beams on or off manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system. • • • • • • • • • • • • • In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.) The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc. The windshield is cracked or damaged. The camera sensor is deformed or dirty. Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights. Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or are not aimed properly. When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness. When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.). When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road. There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror. The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly. The vehicle is listing or titling, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc. The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby. ■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered. 1 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off while the following conditions are met. • The headlight switch is in or . • The headlight switch lever is in high beam position. • Automatic High Beam switch is on. 2 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode. 3 Within 5 seconds after 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 9 times, then leave the lever in high beam position. Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 233 CAUTION ■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary. NOTICE ■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly. ● Do not touch the camera sensor. ● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact. ● Do not disassemble the camera sensor. ● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of windshield near the camera sensor. ● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehicles, etc. ● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the camera sensor. ● Do not overload the vehicle. ● Do not modify the vehicle. ● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield. Contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not replace headlights with non-genuine headlights. Contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● Do not spill liquid onto the camera sensor. 4 234 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Fog light switch The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog. 1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada) Turns the fog lights off 2 Turns the fog lights on ■ Fog lights can be used when The headlights are on in low beam. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 235 Windshield wipers and washer Operating the wiper lever The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.  Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster 1 Temporary operation 2 Intermittent operation 3 Low speed operation 4 High speed operation 4 Driving Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected. 5 Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency 6 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency 7 Washer/wiper dual operation Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 236 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers  Rain-sensing windshield wipers 1 Temporary operation 2 Rain-sensing wiper operation (AUTO) 3 Low speed operation 4 High speed operation When AUTO is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed. The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when AUTO is selected. 5 Increases the sensitivity 6 Decreases the sensitivity 7 Washer/wiper dual operation Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. ■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 237 ■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) ● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops. An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield. ● If the wiper switch is turned to AUTO position while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated. ● When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in AUTO mode, the wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is enhanced. ● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F (-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode. Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. CAUTION ■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers. ■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays 4 238 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. ■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. ■ When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. ■ When standing the windshield wipers up Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 329) Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-4. Refueling 239 Opening the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap: Before refueling the vehicle ● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. ● Confirm the type of fuel. ■ Fuel types Use unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher) 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 240 4-4. Refueling CAUTION ■ When refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling. ● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury. ● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank. ● Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. ● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. ● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. ■ When refueling Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank: ● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. ● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. ● Do not top off the fuel tank. NOTICE ■ Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-4. Refueling 241 Opening the fuel tank cap 1 Press the opener switch to open the fuel filler door. 2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open. 4 Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving 3 242 4-4. Refueling ■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened using the inside switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-4. Refueling 243 Closing the fuel tank cap After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction. CAUTION ■ When replacing the fuel tank cap Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 244 4-5. Using the driving support systems Cruise control Summary of functions Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal. 1 Indicators 2 Cruise control switch Setting the vehicle speed 1 Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. 2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. “SET” indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 245 Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained. 1 Increases the speed 2 Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction. The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated. Canceling and resuming the constant speed control 1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. 2 Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control. Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released. 4 246 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in D or range S4 or higher of S has been selected. ● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed ● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. ● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed. ■ Automatic cruise control cancelation Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information dis- play Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 247 CAUTION ■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On winding roads ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● On steep hills Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. ● During emergency towing 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 248 4-5. Using the driving support systems Dynamic radar cruise control Summary of functions Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead. 1 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button 2 Display 3 Set speed 4 Indicators 5 Cruise control switch : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 249 Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) 1 Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Radar cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. 2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving “SET” indicator will come on. 4 250 4-5. Using the driving support systems Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed. 1 Increases the speed 2 Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: • When the set speed is shown in “MPH” Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held • When the set speed is shown in “km/h” Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held In the constant speed control mode (P. 255), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 251 Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows: 1 Long 2 Medium 3 Short Preceding vehicle mark The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. 4 Driving If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m) Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m) Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 252 4-5. Using the driving support systems Canceling and resuming the speed control 1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the cruise control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. 2 Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed. Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 253 Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-tovehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes. 4 Driving 1 Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. 2 Example of deceleration cruising When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 254 3 4-5. Using the driving support systems Example of follow-up cruising When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. 4 Example of acceleration When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the set speed The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising. Approach warning When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance. ■ Warnings may not occur when In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur: ● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehi- cle speed ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed ● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set ● At the instant the accelerator is applied ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 255 Selecting conventional constant speed control mode When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to dirt etc. 1 Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Radar cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. 2 Switch to constant speed control mode. Cruise control indicator will come on. When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second. After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. If the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off and then turned to IGNITION ON mode again, the vehicle will automatically return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. Adjusting the speed setting: P. 245 Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 245 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving (Push the lever forward and hold for approximately 1 second.) 4 256 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected. ● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h). ■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead. ■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way. ● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wipers are in AUTO mode or the high speed wiper operation). If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 257 ■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ● TRAC is activated for a period of time. ● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch. ■ Radar sensor and grille cover Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected. 1 Grille cover 2 Radar sensor 4 Driving ■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 763) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 258 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Certification  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 259 CAUTION ■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc. ■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Assisting the driver to measure following distance The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings. 4 ● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance ● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation. 260 4-5. Using the driving support systems CAUTION ■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On winding roads ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. ● At entrances to expressways ● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.) ● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often ● During emergency towing ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 261 CAUTION ■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (P. 254) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident may result. ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles traveling at low speeds ● Vehicles that are not moving ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane ■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function- ing of the sensor ● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.) ● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow ● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable ● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may result: 4 262 4-5. Using the driving support systems CAUTION ■ Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident. ● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times. Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area. ● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover. ● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 263 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) Summary of function While driving on a road that has lane markers, this system recognizes the white lane markers using a camera as a sensor to alert the driver when the vehicle deviates from its lane. If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it alerts the driver using beeping and indications on the multi-information display. Camera sensor 4 Driving : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 264 4-5. Using the driving support systems Turning the LDA system on Press the “LDA” switch to activate the system. “LDA” indicator and the lane lines will come on. Press the switch again to turn the LDA system off. The LDA system will remain on or off even if the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. Operating conditions ● When the vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more ● When the lane width is more than approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m) ● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more than approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 265 Indication on the multi-information display When the LDA system is on, the lane lines are shown. The inside of the lane lines turn white when the right and left lane markers are recognized. If the vehicle deviates from the lane, the lane line on the side the vehicle deviates from will flash. The inside of the recognized lane line turns white when the right or left lane marker is recognized. The inside of the lane lines turn black when no lane marker is recognized or the LDA system is temporarily canceled. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving If the vehicle deviates from a lane that has lane markers recognized, the lane line will flash. 266 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Temporary cancelation of the LDA system When the lane departure warning function is activated. The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again. ■ The lane departure warning It may be difficult to feel the sensory warning depending on the road conditions. ■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun The LDA system may not be available and a warning message (P. 771) will be displayed for a while after driving has started. When the temperature in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the camera sensor (P. 263) becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate. ■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly In the following conditions, the LDA system may not operate, or it may not be possible to ensure adequate performance. Also, the camera sensor may be unable to recognize lane markers causing the lane departure warning function to operate incorrectly. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. ● When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing or before a ticket checkpoint ● When driving on a sharp curve ● When lane markers are extremely narrow or extremely wide ● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or improper tire inflation pressure ● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short ● When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to recognize compared to white markers.) ● When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones ● When the lane markers are on a curb etc. ● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc. ● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a shadow covers the lane markers ● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete ● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light ● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the entrance to or exit from a tunnel ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 267 ● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the camera lens ● When driving on roads that are branching or merging ● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing water, etc. ● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement ● When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when the headlights are misaligned ● When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven ● When driving on rough or unpaved roads ■ When changing the tires Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable. ■ Warning messages for LDA system Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 764, 771) 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 268 4-5. Using the driving support systems CAUTION ■ Before using the LDA system Do not rely solely on the LDA system. The LDA system does not drive the vehicle automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving safely. Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident. ■ To avoid operating the LDA by mistake Switch the LDA system off using the “LDA” switch when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system Do not use LDA system in any of the following situations. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident. ● When driving with tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment ● When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinter- preted as lane markers (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.) ● When driving on snowy roads ● When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, etc. ● When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains of old lane markers are still visible on the road ● When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving in a temporary lane ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 269 NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LDA system ● Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights. ● Do not modify the suspension or replace it with non-genuine parts. ● Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.). ● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Camera sensor (P. 263) Observe the following to ensure that the LDA system functions correctly. ● Keep the windshield clean at all times. Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield. ● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near the camera sensor. 4 Driving ● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield. ● Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens. ● If the windshield is fogged up, use the windshield defogger to remove fog from the windshield. When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 270 4-5. Using the driving support systems NOTICE ● Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty. When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass cleaner etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it. The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted. ● Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disas- semble the camera sensor. ● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield. Contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 271 Intuitive parking assist The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. ■ Types of sensors 4 Driving 1 Front center sensors 2 Front corner sensors 3 Rear corner sensors 4 Rear center sensors : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 272 ■ 4-5. Using the driving support systems Intuitive parking assist switch Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 273 Display When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen depending on the position and distance to the obstacle. ■ Multi-information display 1 Front corner sensor detection 2 Front center sensor detection 3 Rear corner sensor detection 4 Rear center sensor detection 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 274 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Navigation system screen/Lexus Display Audio system screen (if equipped) 1 When the rear view monitor system is not displayed A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (P. 279) 2 When the rear view monitor system is displayed (insert display) A simplified image is displayed on the right upper corner of the navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen when an obstacle is detected. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 275 Sensor detection display, obstacle distance ■ Front center sensor Approximate distance to obstacle Navigation MultiNavigation system information system (insert display display) Lexus Display Audio system Lexus Display Audio system (insert display) 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) (continuous) (blinking slowly) (continuous) (blinking slowly) (continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (blinking rapidly) (continuous) (blinking rapidly) (blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous) 4 Driving (continuous) 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 276 ■ 4-5. Using the driving support systems Corner sensors Approximate distance to obstacle Navigation MultiNavigation system information system (insert display display) Lexus Display Audio system Lexus Display Audio system (insert display) 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) (continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (blinking rapidly) (continuous) (blinking rapidly) (blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous) 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ 277 Rear center sensor Approximate distance to obstacle Multi-information display Navigation system (insert display) Lexus Display Audio system (insert display) (continuous) (blinking slowly) (blinking slowly) (continuous) (blinking) (blinking) (continuous) (blinking rapidly) (blinking rapidly) (blinking) (continuous) (continuous) 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) 4 Driving 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm) Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 278 ■ 4-5. Using the driving support systems Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating. ● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously: • Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) • Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) • Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) ● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps. Detection range of the sensors 1 Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) 2 Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) 3 Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 279 Setting up intuitive parking assist (if equipped) You can change the warning beep volume and navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen operating conditions. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch (navigation system) or Lexus Display Audio controller (Lexus Display Audio system). (P. 109) 2 Select “SETUP” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. 4 Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.  Navigation system  Lexus Display Audio system 4 Driving 1 Alert volume setting 2 Display on/off setting 3 Alert distance setting Make sure to save after changing settings. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 280 ■ 4-5. Using the driving support systems Alert volume setting The alert volume can be adjusted. ■ 1 Select “1” to “5” on the “LEXUS Park Assist settings”. 2 Select “Save”. Display on/off setting On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display. 1 Select “Display Off”. When the “Display Off” indicator is turned on, the display of intuitive parking assist will be off. Select “Display Off” again to turn the display of intuitive parking assist on. 2 ■ Select “Save”. Alert distance setting Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set. 1 Select “Front” or “Rear”. Long distance or short distance can be selected. 2 Select “Save”. ■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when ● Front center sensors: • The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. • The shift lever is in a position other than P or R. • The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). ● Front corner sensors: • The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. • The shift lever is in a position other than P. • The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). ● Rear corner and rear center sensors: • The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. • The shift lever is in R. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 281 ■ Intuitive parking assist display When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off. ■ Sensor detection information ● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front cor- ner and rear bumpers. ● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving • There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.) • The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected. • The sensor is covered in any way. • The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. • On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass. • The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. • There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. • The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. • The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna. • Towing eyelets are installed. • The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. • The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb. • In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather. • The area directly under the bumpers is not detected. • If obstacles draw too close to the sensor. • A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed. • People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing. In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are. 282 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles: • • • • • Wires, fences, ropes, etc. Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves Sharply-angled objects Low obstacles Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle ● The following situations may occur during use. • Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible. • Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor. • There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds. • Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision when approached, even if they have been detected once. • It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of air conditioning system. ■ If a message is displayed on the multi-information display P. 763, 770 ■ Certification  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  For vehicles sold in Canada This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 283 CAUTION ■ When using the intuitive parking assist Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. ● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). ● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving for- ward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed. ● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas. NOTICE 4 ■ When using intuitive parking assist-sensor ● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no obstacles are detected. ● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact. ● If the bumper collides with something. ● If the display shows continuously without a beep. ● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor. If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning. ■ Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. 284 4-5. Using the driving support systems Rear view monitor system The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle and fixation guide lines while backing up, for example while parking. The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system Rear view monitor system will activate when the shift lever is in R. If you move the lever out of R, the rear view monitor system will be deactivated. When the shift lever is shifted to the R position and any mode button (such as “MENU”) is pressed, the rear view monitor system is canceled, and the screen is switched to the mode of the button that was pressed. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 285 Using the rear view monitor system ■ Screen description The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode. 1 Vehicle width extension guide line 2 Vehicle center guide lines These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground. 3 Distance guide line The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the center of the edge of the bumper. 4 Distance guide line The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper. 5 Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) If an obstacle is detected while the Intuitive parking assist-sensor is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width. 286 4-5. Using the driving support systems Rear view monitor system precautions ■ Area displayed on screen The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle. To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. (P. 340) • The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions. • Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed. • The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. • Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Corners of bumper 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ 287 Rear view monitor system camera The camera for the rear view monitor system is located above the license plate. 4 If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. ■ Differences between the screen and the actual road The distance guide lines and the vehicle width extension guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually. The distances between the vehicle width extension guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually. The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● Using the camera 288 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road. ● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply The distance guide lines will appear to be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 289 ● When any part of the vehicle sags When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road. ■ A margin of error When approaching three-dimensional objects The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following. Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point 2 . However, in reality if you back up to point 1 , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that 1 is closest and 3 is furthest away. However, in reality, the distance to 1 and 3 is the same, and 2 is farther than 1 and 3 . ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● Distance guidelines 4 290 ■ 4-5. Using the driving support systems Vehicle width extension guide lines Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width extension guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width extension guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width extension guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 291 Things you should know ■ If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Symptom Likely cause The image is blurry If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. (P. 340) Rinse the camera lens Dirt or foreign matter with water and wipe it (such as water droplets, clean with a soft cloth. snow, mud etc.) is adherWash with a mild soap if ing to the camera. the dirt is stubborn. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving • The vehicle is in a dark area • The temperature around the lens is either high or low • The outside temperature is low • There are water droplets on the camera • It is raining or humid The image is difficult to • Foreign matter (mud see etc.) is adhering to the camera • There are scratches on the camera • Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera • The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc. Solution 292 4-5. Using the driving support systems Symptom Likely cause Solution The camera or surround- Have the vehicle The image is out of aligning area has received a inspected by your Lexus ment strong impact. dealer. The fixation guide lines Have the vehicle The camera position is are very far out of aligninspected by your Lexus out of alignment. ment dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 293 CAUTION ■ When using the rear view monitor system When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding. Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries. ● The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle. ● Never back up while looking only at the screen. The image shown on the screen may differ from the actual state, and you could collide with another vehicle or obstacles if backing up looking only at the screen, possibly causing an accident. When backing up, be sure to check in front of and behind the vehicle, both directly and with mirrors. 4 ● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system. ● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it. ● Do not use system in the following cases: • On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow • When using tire chains or the compact spare tire • When the trunk lid is not closed completely • On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes. ● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with mirror all around the vehicle before proceeding. ● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change. ● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (P. 287) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● The instructions given are only guidelines. 294 4-5. Using the driving support systems CAUTION ■ When using the rear view monitor system screen ● The position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change in accordance with the number of passengers, the amount of cargo etc. Be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before proceeding. ● The vehicle width extension guide lines are wider than the actual width of the vehicle. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before proceeding. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 295 NOTICE ■ How to use the camera ● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases, or if the precautions described below are not followed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving • If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. • As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation. • Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot transmit a clear image. • Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible. • If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally. • When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. • When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker. ● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 296 4-5. Using the driving support systems Driving mode select switch The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition. 1 Normal mode For normal driving. Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to Eco mode or sport mode. 2 Eco drive mode Use Eco mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating. When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display. 3 Sport mode Assists acceleration response by controlling the steering and transmission . Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for example when driving on mountain roads. When not in Sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the “SPORT” indicator comes on in the multi-information display. Hybrid vehicles: The hybrid system indicator changes to the tachometer. (P. 93) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 297 ■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (P. 347, 359). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode. ■ Sport mode automatic deactivation Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off after driving in sport mode. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 298 4-5. Using the driving support systems Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. ◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface ◆ Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation ◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces ◆ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control) Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS. Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance. ◆ TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads ◆ Hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles) P. 304 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 299 ◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel ◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) P. 306 When the TRAC/VSC/ABS (hybrid vehicles) systems are operating  Gasoline vehicles The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are operating. Hybrid vehicles The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving  4 300 4-5. Using the driving support systems Disabling the TRAC system If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the button. The “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the button again to turn the system back on. ■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 sec- onds while the vehicle is stopped. The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the multi-information display. Press again to turn the systems back on. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 301 ■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed TRAC and hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles) cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected automatically when driving. ■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems ● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. ■ EPS operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems After turing the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically reactivated in the following situations: ● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off ● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases. If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. • A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. • The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. (gasoline vehicles) • The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. (gasoline vehicles) 302 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes. CAUTION ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road). ● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads. ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi- tions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations: ● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ● When driving with tire chains ● When driving over bumps in the road ● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces ■ TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. ■ When the VSC is activated The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes. ■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 303 CAUTION ■ Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■ Handling of tires and the suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 304 4-5. Using the driving support systems Hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles) Assists with starting off and temporarily maintains braking power even if the foot is removed from the brake pedal when starting off on an incline or a slippery slope. To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped completely. A buzzer will sound once to indicate the system is activated. The slip indicator will also start flashing. ■ Hill-start assist control operating conditions ● The system operates in the following situations: • The shift lever is in a position other than P. • The parking brake is not applied. • The accelerator pedal is not depressed. ● Hill-start assist control cannot be operated while the slip indicator light is illuminated. ■ Hill-start assist control ● While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high mounted stoplight turn on. ● Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released. ● If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check that the operating conditions explained above have been met. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 305 ■ Hill-start assist control buzzer ● When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once. ● In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the buzzer will sound twice. • No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of releasing the brake pedal. • The shift lever is moved to P. • The parking brake is applied. • The brake pedal is depressed again. • The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3 minutes. ■ If the slip indicator comes on It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ Hill-start assist control ate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice. ● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehi- cle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not oper- 4 306 4-5. Using the driving support systems PCS (Pre-Collision System) When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the precollision system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage. The pre-collision system can be turned on and off as necessary by operating the switch. (P. 307) ◆ Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only) If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs. The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 34) However, when the VSC system is disabled, the system will not operate in the event of skidding. ◆ Pre-collision brake assist When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. ◆ Pre-collision braking When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 307 Disabling pre-collision system 1 Enabled 2 Disabled The “PCS” warning light turns on when pre-collision system is disabled. 4 The radar sensor detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving Radar sensor 308 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ The pre-collision system is operational when The pre-collision system off switch is not pressed and the following conditions are met: ● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions A): • Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h). • The system detects sudden braking or skidding. • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions B): • Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h). • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Pre-collision brake assist: • Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h). • The brake pedal is depressed. ● Pre-collision braking: • Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 309 ■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of a collision ● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve ● When driving over a narrow iron bridge ● When there is a metal object on the road surface ● When driving on an uneven road surface ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn ● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front ● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel ● When the steep angle of the road causes a metal object located beneath the road surface to be seen ahead of the vehicle ● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs ● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment 4 ● When passing through certain toll gates When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it. ■ Obstacles not detected The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts. ■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following: ● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces ● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection ● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking ● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms ● When your vehicle is skidding such as the VSC system off ● When your vehicle is steeply inclined ● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ● When passing through an overpass 310 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility. ■ When there is a malfunction in the system “PCS” warning light will flash and warning messages will be displayed. (P. 753, 763) ■ Certification  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 311 CAUTION ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations. ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function- ing of the sensor ● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment etc.) ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident. ● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times. Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area. ● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover. ● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving ■ Handling the radar sensor 4 312 4-5. Using the driving support systems CAUTION ■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind the following important points. ● Assisting the driver in watching the road The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings. ● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation. ● Assisting the driver in taking action The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all involved. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 313 4-5. Using the driving support systems BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions; ● The Blind Spot Monitor function Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes ● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function Assists the driver when backing up These functions use same sensors. 4 Driving 1 BSM main switch Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the switch’s indicator illuminates. Common switch for Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 314 2 4-5. Using the driving support systems Outside rear view mirror indicator Blind Spot Monitor function: When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated. Rear Cross Traffic Alert function: When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash. 3 Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only) When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 315 ■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see. ■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume. ■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (P. 765) ● There is a malfunction with the sensors ● The sensors have become dirty ● The outside temperature is extremely high or low ● The sensor voltage has become abnormal ■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system FCC ID: OAYSRR2A This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  For vehicles sold in Canada Applicable law: Canada 310 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Frequency bands: 24.05-24.25 GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. 4 316 4-5. Using the driving support systems CAUTION ■ Handling the radar sensor One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly. ● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper. ● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper. ● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 317 The Blind Spot Monitor function The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator. The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. The range of the detection area extends to: Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle 1 2 Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper 3 Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper CAUTION ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area 318 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when ● The BSM main switch is set to on ● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). ■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when ● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle. ● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes. ■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects: ● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.* ● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction ● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* ● Following vehicles that are in the same lane* ● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle* *: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 319 ■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function cor- rectly ● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions: • • • • • When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc. • When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle • When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area • When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 Driving During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc. When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc. When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area • When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates • When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road etc. • When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle • When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle • When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle • When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area • Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on ● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/ or object may increase under the following conditions: 320 4-5. Using the driving support systems The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer. 1 Approaching vehicles 2 Detection areas CAUTION ■ Cautions regarding the use of the system The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles etc. before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 321 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away. Example: 4 1 Approximate Speed Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m) Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft (5.5 m) alert distance ■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when ● The BSM main switch is set to on. ● The shift lever is in R. ● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). ● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving Approaching vehicle 322 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehi- cle The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects. ● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.* ● Vehicles approaching from directly behind ● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* ● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle ● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle* ● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle* *: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur. ■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function correctly The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions: ● When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper ● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc. ● When multiple vehicles approach continuously ● Shallow angle parking ● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed ● When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc. ● Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on ● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-6. Driving tips 323 Hybrid vehicle driving tips (hybrid vehicles) For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points: Using Eco drive mode When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (P. 296) Use of Hybrid System Indicator When braking the vehicle Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down. Delays Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. (P. 96) 4 324 4-6. Driving tips Highway driving Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down. Air conditioning Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption. In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner and reduce fuel consumption as well. In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater. Checking tire inflation pressure Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate for the season. Luggage Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause poor fuel consumption. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-6. Driving tips 325 Warming up before driving Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to poor fuel consumption. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 326 4-6. Driving tips Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. Preparation for winter ● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • • • • Engine oil Engine coolant Power control unit coolant (hybrid vehicles) Washer fluid ● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery. ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires. Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-6. Driving tips 327 Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions: ● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. ● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumu- lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes. ● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle. Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving When driving the vehicle 4 328 4-6. Driving tips Selecting tire chains Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size.  Side chain 1 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter 2 0.39 in. (10 mm) in width 3 1.18 in. (30 mm) in length  Cross chain 4 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter 5 0.55 in. (14 mm) in width 6 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length Regulations on the use of tire chains Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. ■ Tire chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains: ● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. ● Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires. ● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km). ● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-6. Driving tips 329 Shifting the windshield wiper position If heavy snow or icy condition is expected, shift the rest position manually. Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position. ■ To rest position Raise the wiper in line with the windshield until it locks. You can stand the wipers up for the rest position. ★: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm) 4 ■ To retract position ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Driving Lower the wipers by pressing on the upper part of the hook section. 330 4-6. Driving tips CAUTION ■ Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Use tires of the specified size. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. ● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. ■ Driving with tire chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera- tions that cause sudden engine braking. ● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. ● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4-6. Driving tips 331 NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ■ Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted. ■ When standing the windshield wipers up Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 329) Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood. 4 Driving ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 332 Interior features 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Lexus Display Audio system ..........................................334 Display settings ...........................339 Setup menu.................................... 341 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system (with the Lexus Display Audio system) ..........347 Automatic air conditioning system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system) ..........359 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers........... 372 Windshield wiper de-icer ........374 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Audio system (with the Lexus Display Audio system)...........376 Using the radio............................ 379 Using the CD player.................394 Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs ..................395 Listening to an iPod...................405 Listening to a USB memory ......................... 413 Using the AUX port ................. 422 Listening to Bluetooth® audio ................... 424 Optimal use of the audio system......................439 Using the steering wheel audio switches............................441 Hands-free system (for cellular phone)................. 444 Using the Bluetooth® phone ........................................... 452 Setting the hands-free system ............................................471 Bluetooth® settings ..................484 333 Interior features 5-4. Using the audio system Audio system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system)...........................493 Using the radio............................496 Using the CD player................ 505 Playing MP3 and WMA discs................................. 514 Operating an iPod .....................522 Operating a USB memory.....532 Bluetooth® audio system ........ 541 Using the Bluetooth® audio system..............................545 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player...... 550 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player.......554 Bluetooth® audio system setup............................... 561 Optimal use of the audio system..............................562 Using the AUX port..................564 Using the steering wheel audio switches ..........................565 Hands-free system (for cellular phone)................ 568 Using the hands-free system (for cellular phones)............... 573 Making a phone call...................581 Setting a cellular phone.......... 585 Security and system setup..... 590 Using the phone book..............595 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 5-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list .........................603 • Interior light............................604 • Personal lights .......................604 5-6. Using the storage features List of storage features ............606 • Glove box .............................. 608 • Console box...........................609 • Cup holders ............................ 610 • Auxiliary box............................. 611 Trunk features ................................612 5-7. Other interior features Sun visors and vanity mirrors .....................614 Clock.................................................615 Power outlets .................................616 Heated steering wheel ............. 618 Seat heaters/ seat ventilators .........................620 Armrest.......................................... 622 Rear sunshade/ rear door sunshades.............. 623 Trunk storage extension .......... 626 Coat hooks....................................627 Assist grips.................................... 628 Garage door opener................ 629 Compass .......................................636 Safety Connect.............................641 334 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Lexus Display Audio system By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio system and hands-free system, etc. Lexus Display Audio controller 1 Displaying the audio control screen (P. 376) 2 Displaying the “Menu” screen (P. 335) 3 Displaying the previous screen 4 Turn or move the controller to select a function, number and screen button. Push the controller to enter the selected function, number and screen button. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system 335 “Menu” screen To display the “Menu” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. Button Function “Phone” Hands-free system (P. 444) “Car” Vehicle information (P. 108) “Setup” Setup menu (P. 341) “Display” Display settings (P. 339) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features “Climate” Automatic air conditioning system (P. 347) 336 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Initial screen If the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds as the system starts up. Images shown on the initial screen can be changed to image1 or image2. (P. 342) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system 337 Lexus Display Audio system operation ■ ■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller 1 Select: Turn or move the controller. 2 Enter: Push the controller. Basic screen operation When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through the list. : This indicator turn on when the list box is selected. To scroll to the next or previous page. : To return to the previous screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features : 5 338 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system ■ When using the screen ● Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react slowly. ● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operat- ing slightly slower than normal. ● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display Settings” screen (P. 339) or remove your sunglasses. CAUTION ■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller ● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Lexus Display Audio controller as this may cause an injury. ● Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temper- atures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle. NOTICE ■ To prevent the Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction ● Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning. ● Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or strong impact as the controller may bend or break off. ● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the Lexus Display Audio controller as this may cause it to stop functioning. ● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Lexus Display Audio con- troller. ● If your hand or any object is on the Lexus Display Audio controller when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Lexus Display Audio controller may not operate properly. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system 339 Display settings You can adjust the contrast and brightness of the screen and also turn the display off. To display the “Display Settings” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Display” on the “Menu” screen. 1 Turns off screen The screen is turned off. To turn it on, press the “AUDIO” or “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. Changes to day mode (P. 339) 3 Adjusts screen contrast/brightness (P. 340) 4 Adjusts screen contrast/brightness of rear view monitor camera (P. 340) Changing between day mode and night mode When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims. However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day Mode”. If the screen is set in day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features 2 340 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness 1 Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen. 2 Adjust the display as desired using “+” or “-”. Select “Contrast” or “Brightness” using the “<<” or “>>”. 3 “-” “+” “Contrast” Weaker Stronger “Brightness” Darker Brighter Select “OK”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system 341 Setup menu You can change the Lexus Display Audio system to your desired setting. To display the “Setup” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 5 Page “General” P. 342 “Voice” P. 346 “Bluetooth*” P. 452 “Phone” P. 471 “Audio” P. 345 “Vehicle” P. 344 *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Button 342 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system General settings This screen is used for various settings. 1 Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.  Page 1 1 Select language (P. 343) 2 Beep on/off 3 Select button color 4 Customize Startup Image  Page 2 The initial screen displayed when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode can be changed to image 1, or image 2 which displays the vehicle screen. 5 Animation on/off The animation effect for audio source selection screen, screen transitions, etc. can be set to “On” or “Off”. 6 3 Personal data can be deleted. (P. 343) When you complete settings, select “Save”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system ■ 343 Selecting a language 1 Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen. 2 Select the desired language. The selectable languages may differ depending on the model or region. ■ Delete personal data 1 Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen. 2 Select “Delete”. Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted. A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”. The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default settings. • • • • • • • • • Phonebook data Call history data Speed dial data Bluetooth® devices data Phone sound settings Detailed Bluetooth® settings Sound settings Preset switch data Last used radio station ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 3 5 344 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Vehicle settings This screen is used for various vehicle settings. 1 Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen. ■ 1 Vehicle customization settings (P. 344) 2 LEXUS park assist settings (P. 279) Vehicle customization settings Various setting can be changed. 1 Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details. (P. 853) 2 When you complete settings, select “Save”. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system 345 Audio settings This screen is used for various audio settings. 1 Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen. 1 HD Radio™ technology settings (P. 385) 2 iPod setting (P. 345) 3 When you complete settings, select “Save”. ■ iPod setting This screen is used for iPod setting. Select “iPod Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen. (P. 345) 2 Select “Display Cover Art”. “On” or “Off” can be selected to display/iPod cover art in the screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 1 5 346 5-1. Lexus Display Audio system Voice settings This screen is used for guidance for Bluetooth® hands-free systems setting. 1 Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen. 3 1 Voice guidance volume setting 2 Voice recognition prompts on/ off 3 Restore default settings When you complete settings, select “OK”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 347 Automatic air conditioning system (with the Lexus Display Audio system) Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. To display the air conditioning operation screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Climate”.  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system P. 359 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 348 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Control panel 1 Air conditioning screen operation 2 Outside temperature display 3 Automatic mode button 4 “OFF” button 5 Fan speed control button 6 Air outlet selector button 7 Windshield defogger button 8 DUAL mode button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 9 Passenger’s side temperature control buttons 10 Passenger’s side temperature display 11 Outside/recirculated air mode button 12 Driver’s side temperature display 13 Driver’s side temperature control buttons 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 349 Automatic air conditioning system control screen 1 Adjusting driver’s side temperature setting 2 Adjusting passenger’s side temperature setting 3 Adjusting the fan speed 4 Selecting air outlet mode 5 Cooling and dehumidification function on/off 6 Dual mode on/off 7 Micro dust and pollen filter on/off 8 Windshield wiper de-icer on/off Using the automatic air conditioning system Press . The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. 2 Press and or select or of the “TEMP” to increase the temperature to decrease the temperature. When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 1 5 350 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the settings manually 1 To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan speed, press on to increase the fan speed and fan speed or select “” of to decrease the fan speed. Press 2 to decrease the to increase the fan speed and “” to turn the fan off. To adjust the temperature setting, press “TEMP” to increase the temperature and temperature. or select of the or to decrease the When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. 3 To change the air outlets, press or select an air outlet switch on the operation screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 351 Defogging the windshield Press . The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged. [ Air outlets and air flow Upper body and feet ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Upper body 5 352 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Feet Feet and windshield Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches among (recirculated air mode), automatic and (outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed. When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 353 Micro dust and pollen filter button Operates micro dust and pollen filter on/off. Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body. Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3 minutes. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 354 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets ■ ■ Front center outlets and front side outlets 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent. Rear seat outlets 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 355 ■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys ● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings. ● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> is turned off, the current air con- ditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door. ■ Air conditioning system settings ● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on, the air condi- tioning system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was turned off. ● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used. ● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer. ■ Using automatic mode ■ Fogging up of the windows ● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. ● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily. ● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. ■ Windshield fog detection function (if equipped) When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor (P. 358) detects fog on the windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog. ■ Outside/recirculated air mode ● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/ recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively. ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tem- perature setting or the inside temperature. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed. 5 356 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning sys- tem is on ● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption. ● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on. ● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing . ■ Automatic mode for air intake control In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic mode on will activate the dehumidification function. ■ Micro dust and pollen filter ● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur: • Outside air mode does not switch to (recirculated air) mode. • The dehumidification function operates. • The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute. ● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press . ● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up. ● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off. ■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency: ● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity ● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: ● Adjust the fan speed ● Turn off Eco drive mode ■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) is pressed. 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 357 ■ Air conditioning odors ● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ● To reduce potential odors from occurring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode. ■ Air conditioning filter P. 708 ■ Customization Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 853) CAUTION ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. 5 358 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger NOTICE ■ Humidity sensor (if equipped) In order to detect fog on the windshield, a sensor which monitors the temperature of the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is installed. (P. 355) Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor: ● Do not disassemble the sensor ● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sen- sor or subject it to strong impacts ● Do not stick anything on the sensor ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 359 Automatic air conditioning system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system) Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system P. 347 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 360 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 1 Driver’s side temperature display 9 Passenger’s side temperature control button 2 Airflow display 10 3 Fan speed display Micro dust and pollen filter button 4 Outside temperature 11 5 Passenger’s side temperature display Outside air or recirculated mode button 12 Off button 6 Air outlet selector button 13 7 Cooling and dehumidification function on/off button Driver’s side temperature control button 14 Automatic mode button DUAL mode button 15 Fan speed control button 16 Windshield defogger button 8 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 361 Using the automatic air conditioning system 1 Press . The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity. 2 Press to switch to automatic air intake mode. The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. 3 Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature. When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 362 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the settings manually 1 2 To adjust the fan speed, select and to decrease the fan speed. Press to turn the fan off. on to increase the fan speed To adjust the temperature setting, press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature. When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. 3 To change the air outlets, press . The air outlets used are switched each time the switch is pressed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 363 Defogging the windshield Press . The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged. [ Air outlets and air flow Upper body and feet ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Upper body 5 364 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Feet Feet and windshield Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches among (recirculated air mode), automatic and (outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed. When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 365 Micro dust and pollen filter button Operates micro dust and pollen filter on/off. Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body. Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3 minutes. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 366 [ 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode 1 Press for 2 or more seconds. 2 Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on . From - 3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 367 Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets ■ Front center outlets and front side outlets 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent. 5 Rear seat outlets 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ■ 368 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys ● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings. ● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> is turned off, the current air con- ditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door. ■ Air conditioning system settings ● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on, the air condi- tioning system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was turned off. ● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used. ● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer. ■ Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed. ■ Fogging up of the windows ● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. ● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily. ● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. ■ Windshield fog detection function (if equipped) When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor (P. 371) detects fog on the windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog. ■ Outside/recirculated air mode ● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/ recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively. ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tem- perature setting or the inside temperature. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 369 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning sys- tem is on ● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption. ● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on. ● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing . ■ Automatic mode for air intake control In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic mode on will activate the dehumidification function. ■ Micro dust and pollen filter ● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur: • Outside air mode does not switch to (recirculated air) mode. • The dehumidification function operates. • The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute. . ● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up. ● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off. ■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency: ● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity ● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: ● Adjust the fan speed ● Turn off Eco drive mode ■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) is pressed. Interior features ● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press 5 370 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Air conditioning odors ● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ● To reduce potential odors from occurring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode. ■ Air conditioning filter P. 708 ■ Customization Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 853) CAUTION ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 371 NOTICE ■ Humidity sensor (if equipped) In order to detect fog on the windshield, a sensor which monitors the temperature of the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is installed. (P. 368) Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor: ● Do not disassemble the sensor ● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sen- sor or subject it to strong impacts ● Do not stick anything on the sensor ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 372 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system On/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.  Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system On/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 373 ■ Operating conditions The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in the IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION ■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Turn the defoggers off when the engine is off. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 374 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Windshield wiper de-icer This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system 1 Display the air conditioning operation screen. (P. 347) 2 Select to the windshield wiper de-icer on/off The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.  Vehicles without a navigation system and the Lexus Display Audio system On/off The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 375 ■ Operating conditions The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in the IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION ■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 376 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Audio system (with the Lexus Display Audio system) To display the audio control screen, press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles without a navigation system or a Lexus Display Audio system P. 493 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Button 377 Page Using the radio P. 379 Using the CD player P. 394 Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs P. 395 Listening to an iPod P. 405 Listening to a USB memory P. 413 Using the AUX port P. 422 Listening to Bluetooth® audio P. 424 Optimal use of the audio system P. 439 Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 441 Hands-free system for cellular phone P. 444 Switching the audio source 1 Press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller to display the audio control screen. 5 2 Select “Source” or press the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller to display the audio source selection screen. Interior features Each time the “MEDIA” button is pressed, an audio source other than radio is changed to. Each time the “RADIO” button is pressed, radio mode is changed. 3 Select the desired audio source. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 378 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating. CAUTION ■ Certification ● Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. ● Laser products • USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. • THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off. ■ To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 379 Using the radio Press the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT”. Control panel 5 Interior features 1 Audio control screen 5 AM/FM/SAT mode buttons 2 Mute button 6 Power 3 Frequency adjustment knob 7 Volume 4 Seek/preset station selector button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 380 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Audio control screen Pressing the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.  “Presets” screen 1 “Options” screen appears 2 Audio source selection screen appears 3 Changing the Multicast Ch 4 Information in the music under broadcasting is memorized 5 Selecting HD Radio™ technology 6 Setting the sound (P. 439) 7 Displaying text messages 8 Scanning for receivable station 9 Preset stations 10 “Presets” screen appears 11 Selecting program type or channel category 12 RBDS message display on/off 13 Displaying traffic messages ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  “Options” screen 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 381 Selecting a station ■ Seek tuning Press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button. ■ Manual tuning Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob. ■ Preset stations Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or select desired preset stations. Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations (6 station per page  6 page) from any of the AM, FM or SAT bands. 1 Select and hold one of the preset stations (1-6 every page). Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) 1 Select “SCAN” on the screen. “SCAN” appears on the screen. The radio will find the next station and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog” is selected (P. 385), and then scan again. 2 Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features 2 Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob or pressing and holding “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button. 382 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information. RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info” indicator is on. ■ Selecting a desired type 1 Select “Options”. 2 Select “FM Info” to turn the indicator on. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 3 383 Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to select program types. The type of program changes each time the button is selected. • Classical • Country • EasyLis (Easy Listening) • Inform (Information) • Jazz • News • Oldies • Other • Pop Music • Religion • Rock • R&B (Rhythm and Blues) • Sports • Talk • Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog) • Alert (Emergency Alert) When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears. 4 Select “TYPE SEEK”. If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type. 5 384 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Traffic announcement Select “Traffic” on the “Options” screen. “TRAF SEEK” appears on the screen, and the radio will start seeking any station broadcasting traffic program information. If no traffic program station is found, “No Traffic” appears on the screen. HD Radio™ technology information (if equipped) HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ HD Radio™ technology settings 1 Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen. 3 Select “HD Radio Settings”. 4 Select “HD Radio/Analog Settings”. 1 Receiving both analog and digital broadcasts 2 Receiving broadcasts only digital 3 Receiving only broadcasts analog Using HD Radio™ technology 1 Select “HD Radio” portion to turn the indicator on. The radio receiver will automatically tune from an analog signal to a digital signal within 5 seconds. An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be displayed when in digital. 2 Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob or pressing and holding “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features ■ 385 386 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Selecting a desired type 1 Select “Options”. 2 Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE” to select program types. The type of program changes each time the button is selected. (P. 382) When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears. 3 Select “TYPE SEEK”. The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type. If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the screen. ■ Displaying text information Information such as the artist name, song title, album title and music genre being listened to are displayed on the text screen. 1 Select “Text”. 2 Select “Additional Information” to display messages from the station. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 387 Changing the multiple or supplemental programs On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have multiple or supplemental programs on one FM station. Select “Multicast”. Each time “Multicast” is selected, the supplemental program changes. If “Multicast” is selected when tuned to the last of the supplemental programs, the main program will be returned to. ■ Preserving tag information Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system and transmits to an iPod. Select “Tag” to bookmark the music information. 2 Connect iPod using an iPod cable. (P. 405) 5 Interior features 1 The music tag moves from the system into the iPod. If tagging the music information fails, error message will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on. When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 388 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system HD Radio™ technology troubleshooting guide Experience Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or skip. Cause Action The radio stations analog and digital vol- None, radio broadcast issue. A ume is not properly user can contact the radio staaligned or the station tion. is in ballgame mode. Reception issue, may clear-up Radio is shifting Sound fades, blendas the vehicle continues to be between analog and ing in and out. driven. Selecting “Analog” can digital audio. force radio in an analog audio. Audio mute condition This is normal behavior, wait The radio does not when an HD2/HD3 until the digital signal returns. If have access to digital multicast channel had out of the coverage area, seek a signals at the moment. been playing. new station. The digital multicast content is not availAudio mute delay able until HD Radio™ when selecting an broadcast can be This is normal behavior, wait for HD2/HD3 multicast decoded and make the audio to become available. the audio available. channel preset. This takes up to 7 seconds. Broadcaster should be notified. Text information does Complete the form; www.ibiqData service issue by uity.com/automotive/ not match the present the radio broadcaster. report_radio_station_experien song audio. ces. Broadcaster should be notified. No text information Complete the form; www.ibiqData service issue by uity.com/automotive/ shown for the present the radio broadcaster. report_radio_station_experien selected frequency. ces. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 389 XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) ■ ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio 1 Press the “RADIO” button or select “SAT” on the audio source selection. 2 Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired channel in the all categories or press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired channel in the current category. Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Select and hold one of the preset stations (1-6 every page). 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 390 ■ ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Changing the channel category 1 Select “Options”. 2 Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE”. Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels Scanning channels in the current category 1 Select “SCAN” on the screen. “SCAN” appears on the screen. 2 ■ Select “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is reached. Displaying the title and artist name Select “Text”. The screen will show up to 64 characters. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 391 ■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected All preset stations are erased. ■ Reception sensitivity ● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio. ● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters. ● The radio antenna is mounted inside the trunk and the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window. ■ XM® Satellite Radio An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. ● XM® subscriptions ● Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob, and the receiver’s 8-character ID number will appear. ● Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A.  Visit on the web at www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349. Canada  Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. 392 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action. Message Explanation The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely. SAT Check Antenna SAT Ch Unauthorized A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance. You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “CH 000” and all free-to-air channels. The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio. SAT No Signal The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. SAT Channel Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 393 Message Explanation ----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action is required. The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous SAT Chan Unavailable channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada). ■ Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 394 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Using the CD player 1 Audio control screen 5 Audio source selector button 2 Playback/Pause button 6 Power 3 Track/file selector knob 7 Volume 4 Track/file selector button 8 Eject button Loading a disc Insert a disc into the disc slot. Ejecting a disc Press and remove the disc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 395 Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs Insert a disc or press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “CD” with a disc inserted. Audio control screen Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.  Audio CD  MP3/WMA disc 5 Audio source selection screen appears 2 Displaying the track/file list 3 Select: Playing the previous track/file Select and hold: Reversing a track/file 4 Pause Select to play 5 Select: Playing the next track/file Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a track/file 6 Repeat play 7 Random playback 8 Setting the sound (P. 439) 9 Displaying the folder list ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 1 396 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks (Audio CD) ■ Selecting a track Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number. To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button until you hear a beep. ■ Selecting a track from audio control screen Select or . To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold ■ or until you hear a beep. Selecting a track from the track list 1 Select “Tracks” on the screen. 2 Select the desired track number. Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files (MP3/WMA disc) ■ Selecting a file Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired file number. To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button until you hear a beep. ■ Selecting a file from audio control screen Select or . To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) or until you hear a beep. 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 397 Selecting a file from the file list 1 Select “Files” on the screen. 2 Select the desired file number. Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA disc) 1 Select “Folders” on the screen. 2 Select the desired folder number. 5 Select the desired file number. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 3 398 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Random playback Each time  is selected, the mode changes in the following order: Audio CD : Random play on the disc : Off  MP3/WMA disc : Random play on the folder : Random play in all the folders : Off Repeat play Each time  is selected, the mode changes in the following order: Audio CD : Track repeat : Off  MP3/WMA disc : File repeat : Folder repeat : Off ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 399 ■ Displaying the title and artist name If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. ■ Error messages Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer. Message Cause Correction procedures Check DISC • The disc is dirty or dam• Clean the disc. aged. • The disc is inserted • Insert the disc correctly. • Confirm the disc is upside down. playable with the player. • The disc is not playable with the player. DISC Error There is a malfunction Eject the disc. within the system. No music files found. This indicates that no playable data is included Eject the disc. in the disc. Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly. ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. ■ If disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods Disc may be damaged and may not play properly. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ■ Discs that can be used 5 400 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. ■ MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded. ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps) ● Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 401 ● Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used. • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) UDF (2.01 or lower) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root) • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● Discs containing multi-session recordings ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. 5 402 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ● MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. ● Playback • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 403 NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) ● Low-quality and deformed CDs 5 recording area ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ● CDs with a transparent or translucent 404 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system NOTICE ■ CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 405 Listening to an iPod Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “iPod” with an iPod connected. Connecting an iPod 1 Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. 5 2 Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable. 406 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Control panel 1 Audio control screen 5 Audio source selector button 2 Playback/Pause button 6 Power 3 Song selector knob 7 Volume 4 Song selector button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 407 Audio control screen Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source. 1 iPod video mode 2 Selecting the play mode 3 Audio source selection screen appears 4 Setting the sound (P. 439) 5 Shuffle play 6 Repeat play 7 Select: Playing the next song Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a song 8 to playback 9 Select: Playing the previous song Select and hold: Reversing a song 10 Displaying the song list ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Pause Select 5 408 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Selecting a play mode 1 Select “Browse” on the screen. 2 Select the desired play mode by selecting the “Playlists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs”, “Podcasts”, “Audiobooks”, “Genres” or “Composers” tabs. Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing songs ■ Selecting one song at a time Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired song. To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button until you hear a beep. ■ Selecting a song from audio control screen Select or . To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold ■ Selecting a song from the list 1 Select “Songs” on the screen. 2 Select the desired song. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) or until you hear a beep. 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 409 Shuffle play Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order: : Playing the songs in shuffle : Playing the albums in the iPod in shuffle : Off When a large number of songs is stored in an iPod, shuffle selection may take time. Repeat play Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order: : Repeating the song 5 : Off Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 410 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ About iPod ● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. ● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. ● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ■ iPod cover art ● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. ● This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 345) ● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process. ● Only iPod cover art that is saved in a JPEG format can be displayed. ■ iPod functions ● When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound by selecting on the “iPod” screen. ● Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard. ● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. ● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. ● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead. ● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use. ● Supported models (P. 411) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 411 ■ iPod problems To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual. ■ Error messages “Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to connect the iPod.”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection. “There are no songs available for playback. Please load compatible media to your iPod.”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod. ■ Compatible models The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system. ● Made for ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features • iPod touch (4th generation) • iPod touch (3rd generation) • iPod touch (2nd generation) • iPod touch (1st generation) • iPod classic • iPod with video • iPod nano (6th generation) • iPod nano (5th generation) • iPod nano (4th generation) • iPod nano (3rd generation) • iPod nano (2nd generation) • iPod nano (1st generation) • iPhone 4 • iPhone 3GS • iPhone 3G • iPhone Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system. 412 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect iPod or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to iPod ● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con- nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter- minal. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 413 Listening to a USB memory Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “USB” with a USB memory connected. Connecting a USB memory 1 Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. 5 Open the cover and connect a USB memory. Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 2 414 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Control panel 1 Audio control screen 5 Audio source selector button 2 Playback/Pause button 6 Power 3 File selector knob 7 Volume 4 File selector button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 415 Audio control screen Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source. 1 Audio source selection screen appears 2 Displaying the folder list 3 Displaying the file list 4 Select: Playing the previous file Select and hold: Reversing a file 5 Pause Select 6 to playback Select: Playing the next file Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a file Repeat play 8 Random playback 9 Setting the sound (P. 439) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 7 5 416 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files ■ Selecting one file at time Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired file. To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button until you hear a beep. ■ Selecting a file from audio control screen Select or . To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold ■ Selecting a file from the list 1 Select “Files” on the screen. 2 Select the desired file number. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) or until you hear a beep. 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 417 Selecting a folder 1 Select “Folders” on the screen. 2 Select the desired folder number. 3 Select the desired file number. 5 Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order: : Random play on the folder : Random play in all the folders : Off ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Random playback 418 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Repeat play Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order: : File repeat : Folder repeat : Off ■ USB memory functions ● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. ● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory. ■ Error messages for USB memory “Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to connect the USB device.”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. “No compatible audio files found. Please add compatible files to your USB device.”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 419 ■ USB memory ● Compatible devices USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback. ● Compatible device formats The following device formats can be used: • USB communication formats: USB2.0 HS (480Mbps) • File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows) • Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root) • Maximum number of files in a device: 9999 • Maximum number of files per folder: 255 ● MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression. 420 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR) ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 421 ● MP3 and WMA playback • When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. • When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played). ● Playback CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to USB memories ● Do not leave USB memories in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. 422 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Using the AUX port This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. 1 Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. 2 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device. 3 Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “AUX”. ■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. ■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 423 CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to portable audio device ● Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 424 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Listening to Bluetooth® audio The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function. Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Bluetooth*”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 425 Control panel 5 Interior features 1 Audio control screen 5 Audio source selector button 2 Playback/Pause button 6 Power 3 Track selector knob 7 Volume 4 Track selector button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 426 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Audio control screen Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source. 1 Audio source selection screen appears 2 Displaying the list 3 Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player 4 Displaying the track list 5 Select: Playing the previous track Select and hold: Reversing a track 6 Playback 7 Pause 8 Select: Playing the next track Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a track 9 Repeat play 10 Random playback 11 Setting the sound (P. 439) Some titles and controls may not be displayed depending on the type of portable audio player. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 427 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Status display You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the screen. 1 Connection status 2 Battery charge Indicators Connection status Battery charge Conditions Good No connection Full Empty 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 428 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Registering a Bluetooth® audio player To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to register your portable audio player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music on the vehicle’s audio system. You can register up to 5 devices in the system. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. 2 Select “Connect”. 3 Select “Yes”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 4 429 Input the passcode displayed on the screen into your portable audio player. For the operation of the portable audio player, see the manual that comes with your portable audio player. Passcodes are not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the device, you may need to select “Yes” to register, or “No” to cancel on your Bluetooth® device. If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”. If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. 5 430 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Selecting the Bluetooth® audio player If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device at a time. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. 2 Select “Connect”. 3 Select the device to connect. “Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth® device. (P. 485) The selection indicator is displayed on left side of the selected device name. The Bluetooth® mark is displayed when you connected the device. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 431 Connecting the Bluetooth® audio player There are two connection methods available. ■ When the connection method is set to “From Vehicle” When the portable audio player is on standby for the connection, it will be automatically connected whenever the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. ■ When the connection method is set to “From Audio Player” Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio system. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. 2 Select “Connect”. 5 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 432 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 3 Select the device to connect. A message is shown if connection has been successful. If connection fails, a message will be displayed and connection will be re-attempted. Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks ■ Selecting a track Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number. To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button until you hear a beep. ■ Selecting a track from audio control screen Select or . To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold ■ Selecting a track from the list  From “Tracks” 1 Select “Tracks” on the screen. 2 Select the desired track. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) or until you hear a beep. 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system  From “Browse” 1 Select “Browse” on the screen. 2 Select the desired item. 433 Continue to select the applicable screen button until its track list is displayed. 3 Select the desired track. 5 Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order: : Random play on the album : Random play in all the album : Off ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Random playback 434 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Repeat play Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order: : Track repeat : Album repeat : Off ■ When using the Bluetooth® audio system ● In the following conditions, the system may not function. • If the portable audio player is turned off • If the portable audio player is not connected • If the portable audio player’s battery is low • If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box • If metal is covering or touching the portable player ● There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth® audio play. ● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available. ■ Bluetooth® antenna The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate. ■ Battery charge/signal status This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player, and this system does not have a charging function. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 435 ■ About Bluetooth® The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. ■ Compatible models Portable audio players must correspond to the specifications. ● Bluetooth® specifications: Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher) ● Profiles: ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features • A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher) This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sounds to the headphone. • AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher) This is a profile to remote control the A/V equipment. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player. 436 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system FCC ID: AJDK046 IC ID: 775E-K046 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. ■ Reconnecting the portable audio player If the portable audio player is disconnected with a poor reception when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player. If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect: ● Select the portable audio player again ● Enter the portable audio player ■ When you release your car Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 343) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 437 CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). 5  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  For vehicles sold in Canada Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 438 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect portable players or operate the controls. ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implanted pace- makers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to portable players Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 439 Optimal use of the audio system Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. Select on the audio control screen to adjust the sound settings.  “Sound” tab 1 2 3 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the treble, mid or bass to a level between -5 to 5. Select “Front” or “Rear” to adjust the front/rear audio balance to a level between Front 7 and Rear 7. 6 7 Select “L” or “R” to adjust the left/right audio balance to a level between L7 and R7.  “DSP” tab 1 Surround on/off 2 Automatic sound levelizer (ASL) on/off ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 4 5 5 440 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately. ■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL) ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 441 Using the steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. 1 Radio mode: Selects radio stations CD mode: Selects tracks/files and folders (MP3/WMA) iPod mode: Selects songs USB memory mode: Selects files and folders Bluetooth® audio mode: Selects tracks and albums Increases/decreases volume 3 Press: Turns the power on, selects audio source Press and hold: Pause or mute Interior features 2 5 Turning the audio system on To turn the audio system on, press ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 442 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be skipped. FMSATCD playeriPod or USB memory Bluetooth® audioAUXAMFM Adjusting the volume Press to increase the volume and to decrease the volume. Hold the button in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the volume. Silencing a sound Press and hold . To cancel, press and hold . Selecting a radio station 1 Press 2 Press to select the radio mode. or to select a radio station. To seek stations, press and hold To cancel, press either switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) or until you hear a beep. 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 443 Selecting a track/file or song 1 Press mode. 2 Press to select the CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB memory or to select the desired track/file or song. Selecting a folder or album 1 Press to select the CD (only when MP3/WMA disc is in use), Bluetooth® audio or USB memory mode. 2 Press and hold or until you hear a beep. CAUTION ■ To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 444 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Hands-free system (for cellular phone) The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it. This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls. Telephone switch 1 Volume switch During an incoming call: Adjusts the ring tone volume During an ongoing call: Adjusts the receiver volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button. 2 Talk switch Press: Turns the voice command system on Press and hold: Turns the voice command system off 3 Off hook switch • Sending • Receiving • “Phone” screen display 4 On hook switch • End call • Refuse call ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 445 Microphone You can use the microphone when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers. To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in the system. (P. 453) 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 446 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Status display You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on the “Phone” screen. 1 Connection status 2 Battery charge 3 Call area 4 Signal strength Indicators Connection status Battery charge Call area Signal strength Conditions Good Not connected Full Empty “Rm”: Roaming area Excellent Poor ■ When using the hands-free system ● The audio system is muted when making a call. ● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear. ● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connecting condition may go down. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 447 ● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party: • • • • • When driving on unpaved roads When driving at high speeds If a window is open If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone ■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the cellular phone is turned off ● If you are outside service range ● If the cellular phone is not connected ● If the cellular phone’s battery is low ● When outgoing is controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc. ● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used ● When transferring the phonebook data from the cellular phone ■ Bluetooth® antenna ■ Battery charge/Signal status ● This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself. ● This system does not have a charging function. ● The Bluetooth® phone battery will burn quickly when it is connected to Bluetooth®. ● When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed. ● When you are out of service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No service” is displayed. ■ When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time The following problems may occur. ● The Bluetooth® connection may be cut. ● Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features The antenna is built into the display. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate. 448 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ About the phonebook in this system The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data. ● Phonebook data ● Call history date ● Speed dial When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted. ■ When you release your car Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 343) ■ About Bluetooth® The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. ■ Compatible models This system supports the following service. ● Bluetooth® Specification: Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher) ● Profiles: • HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher) This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using the cellular phone or head sets. It has an outgoing and incoming call function. • OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher This is a profile to exchange phonebook data. When the Bluetooth® phone has PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used. • PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher This is a profile to transfer phonebook data. If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone. You need to take OPP or PBAP service individually. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 449 ■ Certification for the hands-free system FCC ID: AJDK046 IC ID: 775E-K046 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 450 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  For vehicles sold in Canada Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 451 CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone. ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implanted pace- makers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to cellular phones ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Do not leave cellular phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone. 5 452 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Using the Bluetooth® phone 1 Device name 2 Bluetooth® connection status (P. 446) 3 Dialing from history (P. 462) 4 Speed dialing (P. 462) 5 Dialing from the phonebook (P. 460) 6 Dialing by inputting a number (P. 459) 7 Connecting a Bluetooth® phone (P. 455) To display the screen shown above, press on the steering wheel or press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 453 Registering a Bluetooth® phone To use the hands-free system, you must register a Bluetooth® phone in the system. You can register up to 5 phones in the system. 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Yes”. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 454 3 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Input the passcode displayed on the screen into your phone. For the operation of the phone, see the manual that comes with your cellular phone. Depending on the type of phone, further phone operations may be required after inputting the passcode (for example to confirm if connection is to be received or not) when registering a phone. Passcodes are not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the phone, you may need to select “Yes” to register, or “No” to cancel on your cellular phone. If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”. If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete. If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 455 Selecting the Bluetooth® phone If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device at a time. 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Connect Phone”. 3 Select the device to connect. “Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth® device. (P. 485) The Bluetooth® mark is displayed when you connected the device. When the system cannot get the device names, alternate names will be displayed such as “Device1”, “Device2”, etc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features The selection indicator is displayed on left side of the selected device name. 5 456 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Connecting a Bluetooth® phone There are two connecting methods available-automatic and manual. ■ Automatic When you register your phone, auto connection will be activated. Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where connection can be established. When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered. Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed. Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be required (to confirm if connection is to be received or not) even when automatically connected. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 457 Manual When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off (P. 491), you must connect Bluetooth® manually. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Connect Phone”. 3 Select the device to connect. A message is shown if connection has been successful. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features If connection fails, a message will be displayed and connection will be re-attempted. 5 458 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect. If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected. ■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing ● Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily. ● It may take time to connect. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 459 Making a call Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure: ■ Dialing 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Dial” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Input the phone number. To delete the inputted phone number, select . For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “” for a while. 4 Press on the steering wheel or select . ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Depending on the type of phone, when internet communication functions such as skype are available, phone operations (selecting between normal phone communication or internet communication) may be necessary after dialing operations are performed. 5 460 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Dialing from the phonebook You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 474) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Choose the desired data to call from the list. If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed. (P. 461) 4 Choose the number and then press on the steering wheel or select . ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 461 ● When the phonebook is empty You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP service, you cannot transfer contacts. 1 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 2 If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.  For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone 5 3 Select “Yes” if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone. Select “No” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts. Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be necessary when transferring contacts by PBAP. Interior features  For PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth® phone 3 Select “Transfer” if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone. Select “Cancel” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts. You need to operate your phone to transfer new contacts. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 462 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Calling using speed dial You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook. ■ 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select the desired tab and choose the desired number to make a call. Dialing from history You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below. “All”: all the calls below which were memorized “Missed”: calls which you missed “Incoming”: calls which you received “Outgoing”: calls which you called 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select the desired tab and choose the desired data from the list. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 4 ■ 463 Press on the steering wheel or select . Calling using voice recognition Calls can be made by giving a voice command. 1 Press the talk switch. To cancel voice recognition press and hold the talk switch. 2 Following the system guidance, wait for the beep, and then say the desired voice commands. Voice prompts on/off 2 Voice commands Voice commands marked with . 3 are Canceling voice recognition system ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 1 5 464 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ● Dial by name The procedure below shows “Call ” or “Call at ”. Follow similar procedures for the other operations. 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a registered contact. 3 Say “Dial” or press steering wheel. on the Say or select “Go Back” to return to the previous screen. ■ Call history list ● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phonebook, the name is displayed in the call history. ● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history. ■ When driving The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history” (only the 6th page of “All” tab) are unavailable. ■ International calls You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the cellular phone in use. ■ Calling by using the latest call history item 1 Press on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen. 2 Press on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen. 3 Press on the steering wheel to select the latest history item. 4 Press on the steering wheel or select ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) to call the latest history item. 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 465 ■ Voice guidance function ● Voice guidance for the voice recognition system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch. ● When “Voice Prompts (on/off)” is selected, voice recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press the talk switch again. ● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk switch. ■ Using voice command ● Using voice command “Call ” or “Call at ” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features • In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Call ” or “Call at ”, after saying “Call” say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a contact. For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”, “Mary Davis”, “at”, “Mobile” • There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Work and Other. • Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change names in the phonebook to full names. • Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”. • When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a name from the candidate list. • When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list. 466 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ● Using voice command “Dial ” • In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Dial ”, after saying “Dial” say the phone number. • Say the phone number one digit at a time. For example, if the phone number is 2345678: Say “two three four five six seven eight” Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty seven eight” • The system can recognize the following types of the phone numbers: 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611) 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers) 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number) 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number) • As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number without stopping. • When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list. ● Using voice command “International call”. Up to 20 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized. ■ When using voice recognition Speak clearly when using the voice recognition, otherwise the system may not correctly recognize your voice. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to recognize your voice. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 467 Receiving a call When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound. To answer the phone: • Press on the steering wheel. • Select . ■ To refuse a call Press ■ on the steering wheel or select . To adjust the incoming call volume Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches or volume knob. Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ■ International calls 5 468 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Speaking on the phone The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone. ■ To adjust the receiver volume Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches or the volume knob. ■ To prevent the other party from hearing your voice Select “Mute”. ■ Inputting tones When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook. 1 Select “0-9”. 2 Input the number. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 3 469 If repeated tone symbols* are stored in the phone book, “Send” and “Exit” are displayed on the right side of the screen. *: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p or w, that come after the phone number. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1 ) 4 Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”. If you select “Exit”, this function will end. ■ To transfer a call Select “Handset Mode” to change from Hands-free call to cellular phone call. Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone call to Handsfree call. ■ To hang up on the steering wheel or select ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . Interior features Press 5 470 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Call waiting When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming call message will be displayed. To talk with the other party: • Press on the steering wheel. • Select . To refuse the call: • Press on the steering wheel. • Select . Every time you press on the steering wheel or select call waiting, you will be switched to the other party. during ■ Transferring calls ● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the cellular phone while driving. ● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen. ● Transfer method and operate may vary according to the cellular phone used. ● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual. ■ Call waiting operation Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular phone. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 471 Setting the hands-free system You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings. 1 Setting the sound 2 Phonebook settings 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below. 5 472 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Setting the sound 1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 471) 2 Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen. 1 Changes the speaker volume (P. 472) 2 Changes the ring tone volume (P. 472) 3 Changes the ring tone (P. 473) 4 Restore default settings 3 When you complete settings, select “Save”. ■ Setting the volume 1 Select “Call Volume” or “Ring Tone Volume” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select “-” or “+” to lower or raise the volume, and then “OK”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 473 Setting the ring tone 1 Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen. 2 Select “Tone1”, “Tone2” or “Tone3” to change the ring tone, and then “OK”. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 474 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Phonebook settings The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phones in total. The data for 1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each phonebook. 1 Managing the contacts 2 Managing the speed dials 3 Deleting the call history To display the screen above, follow the steps below. 1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 471) 2 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 475 Managing the contacts ● Transferring a phone number You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts. 1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 474) 2 Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen. 3 Select “Transfer Contacts”. 5 1 For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones Automatic phonebook download on/off The phonebook data can be automatically transferred. Depending on the cellular phone, call history will be also transferred. 2 Update phonebook The phonebook data can be updated. 3 Restore default settings ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features  476 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system  For PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones 1 Replace contacts The phonebook data can be replaced. 2 Add contacts The phonebook can be added. ● Deleting the phonebook data 1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 474) 2 Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen. 3 Select “Delete Contacts”. If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download Contacts” setting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 475) 4 Choose the data to delete. To delete all data, select “All Delete”. 5 A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 477 ■ Phonebook data Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data. ■ Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen. 4 Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen. ■ When transferring a phone number Transfer the phone number while engine is running . If your cellular phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input “1234” by your cellular phone for OBEX certification. ■ When you have selected “Update Contacts” to transfer the phone number ● If your cellular phone does not support PBAP service, you cannot use this function. ● If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook data with- out operating your phone. ■ When you have selected “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contacts” to transfer the If your cellular phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these functions. You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone. ■ Transferring the phone number in a different way (To display the “Transfer Con- tacts” screen) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen. ■ Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth® audio is playing Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer finishes. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features phone number 5 478 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Deleting the phonebook data in a different way 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Choose the desired data from the list. 4 Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen. 5 Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen. 6 A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”. If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download Contacts” setting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 475) When you delete a Bluetooth® phone, the phonebook data will be deleted at the same time. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 479 Managing the speed dials ■ Registering the speed dial from contacts You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to 18 numbers per phone can be registered. Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 474) 2 Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen. 3 Select “New Speed Dial from Contacts”. 4 Choose the data to register. 5 Select the desired phone number. 5 Interior features 1 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 480 ■ 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 6 Select the switch you want to register the number in. 7 If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”. Registering the speed dial from call history 1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 474) 2 Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen. 3 Select “New Speed Dial from Call History” on the “Speed Dials” screen. 4 Choose the data to register. 5 Select the switch you want to register the number in. 6 If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ 481 Deleting the speed dial 1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 474) 2 Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen. 3 Select “Delete Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen. 4 Choose the data to delete. To delete all data, select “All Delete”. 5 A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”. ■ Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen) Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen. ■ Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Contacts” screen) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen. 4 Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 1 5 482 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen. 4 Select “Contacts” or “History” to set new speed dial. Select “Cancel” to cancel it. 5 Choose the desired data from the list. 6 Select the desired phone number. ■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact” screen) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Choose the desired data from the list. 4 Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen. 5 Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen. 6 Select the desired telephone number. 7 Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from (P. 479). 6 ■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Call History” screen) 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Choose the desired data from the list. 4 Select “Add Speed Dial” on the “Call History” screen. 5 Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from call history” from (P. 480) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 . 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 483 Deleting the call history 1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 474) 2 Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen. If your phone supports PBAP service, the “Automatically Download Contacts” setting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 475) 3 Choose the desired history to delete. 4 Choose the data to delete. To delete all data, select “All Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”. ■ Deleting call history in a different way 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 452) 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen. 3 Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen. 4 Follow the steps “Deleting the call history” from ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 4 . (P. 483) Interior features 5 5 484 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Bluetooth® settings You can set the Bluetooth® system to your desired settings. 1 Registered devices settings 2 Connecting telephone 3 Connecting audio player 4 Detailed Bluetooth® settings To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. 2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen. 3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 485 Registered devices settings ■ Registering a Bluetooth® device Bluetooth® devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5 Bluetooth® devices. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 484) 2 Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. 3 Select “Add New”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 486 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 4 When this screen is displayed, input the passcode displayed on the screen into your Bluetooth® device. For the operation of the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with your Bluetooth® device. Depending on the type of phone, further phone operations may be required after inputting the passcode (for example to confirm if connection is to be received or not) when registering a phone. Passcodes are not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the phone, you may need to select “Yes” to register, or “No” to cancel on your cellular phone. If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”. If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete. If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. ■ Removing a Bluetooth® device 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 484) 2 Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 3 Select “Remove”. 4 Select the device to remove. 5 A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to remove the device. Displaying a Bluetooth® device details You can confirm and change the device details. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 484) 2 Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. 3 Select “Details”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features ■ 487 488 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 4 Select the device. 5 Following screen is displayed: 1 Display device name 2 Display device address 3 Display your number telephone The number may not be displayed depending on the phones. 6 4 Display compatibility profile of the device 5 Change connection method (P. 489) 6 Restore default settings When you complete settings, select “OK”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 489 ● Changing connection method 1 Select “Connection Method” on the “Device Details” screen. 2 Select “From Vehicle” or “From Audio Player”. “From Vehicle”: Connect the audio system to the portable audio player. “From Audio Player”: Connect the portable audio player to the audio system. Selecting the Bluetooth® phone If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device at a time. Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 484) 2 Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. 3 Select the device to connect. “Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth® device. (P. 485) The selection indicator is displayed on left side of the selected device name. The Bluetooth® mark is displayed when you connected the device. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features 1 490 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system Selecting the audio player If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device at a time. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 484) 2 Select “Connect Audio Player” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. 3 Select the device to connect. “Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth® device. (P. 485) The selection indicator is displayed on left side of the selected device name. The Bluetooth® mark is displayed when you connected the device. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system 491 Detailed Bluetooth® settings You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 484) 2 Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. 3 Following screen is displayed: 1 Change Bluetooth® power on/off You can change Bluetooth® function to “On” or “Off” 2 Display device name 3 Change passcode (P. 492) 4 Display device address 5 Restore default settings 6 Display compatibility profile of the system 7 Change displaying telephone status on/off 5 8 Change displaying player status on/off audio You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting audio player 4 When you complete settings, select “Save”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting telephone 492 5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system ■ Editing the passcode You can change the passcode that you use to register your Bluetooth® device in the system. 1 Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. 2 Input a passcode, and select “OK”. To delete the inputted phone number, select . *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 493 Audio system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system)  Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.  Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system P. 376  CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type A) 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 494  5-4. Using the audio system CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type B) Title Page Using the radio P. 496 Using the CD player P. 505 Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 514 Operating an iPod P. 522 Operating a USB memory P. 532 Using the Bluetooth® audio system P. 545 Optimal use of the audio system P. 562 Using the AUX port P. 564 Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 565 Hands-free system for cellular phones P. 568 ■ Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 495 CAUTION ■ Certification ● Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. ● Laser products • USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. • THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off. Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ■ To avoid damaging the audio system 5 496 5-4. Using the audio system Using the radio  Type A 1 AMFM/SAT mode buttons 6 Traffic information button 2 Scan button 7 Preset station buttons 3 Seek button 8 Radio text message button 4 Channel category button 9 Power 5 Frequency adjustment (AM/FM 10 Volume mode) and channel (SAT mode) knob ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system  497 Type B 5 Interior features 1 AMFM buttons 5 Traffic information button 2 Seek button 6 Preset station buttons 3 Channel category button 7 Radio text message button 4 Frequency adjustment knob 8 Power 9 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 498 5-4. Using the audio system Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) 1 Search for the desired stations by turning on 2 or pressing “” or “” . Press and hold the button (from to until you hear a beep. to ) the station is to be set Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) (type A) ■ Scanning the preset radio stations 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each. 2 ■ When the desired station is reached, press the button again. Scanning all the radio stations within range 1 Press . All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each. 2 When the desired station is reached, press the button again. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 499 RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information. ■ Receiving RBDS broadcasts 1 Press “” or “” on during FM reception. The type of program changes each time the button is pressed. ● “ROCK” ● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening) ● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz) ● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues) ● “INFORM” (Information) ● “RELIGION” 5 ● “MISC” (Miscellaneous) If the system receives no RBDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display. 2 Press , or “” or “” on . The radio seeks or scans for stations of the relevant program type. ■ Displaying radio station names Press ■ . Displaying radio text messages Press twice. A text message is displayed when “MSG” is shown on the screen. If the text continues past the end of the display, until you hear a beep. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) is displayed. Press and hold Interior features ● “ALERT” (Emergency messages) 500 5-4. Using the audio system XM® Satellite Radio (type A) ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio 1 Press . The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed: “SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3” 2 Turn to select the desired channel in all the categories or press “” or “” on current category. ■ to select the desired channel in the Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from ) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep. ■ Changing the channel category Press “” or “” on ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . to 5-4. Using the audio system ■ 501 Scanning the XM® Satellite Radio channels ● Scanning the channels in the current category 1 Press . 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button again. ● Scanning the preset channels ■ 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button again. Displaying text information Press . The display will show up to 10 characters. The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed: ● CH NAME ● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) ● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ● CH NUMBER 5 502 5-4. Using the audio system ■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected All preset stations are erased. ■ Reception sensitivity ● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio. ● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters. ● The radio antenna is mounted inside the trunk and the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window. ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. ● XM® subscriptions For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A.  Visit on the web at www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349. Canada  Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. ● Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver’s 8-character ID number will appear. ● Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 503 ■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action. “ANTENNA” “UNAUTH” The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all the free-to-air channels. “NO SIGNAL” The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. “LOADING” The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. “OFF AIR” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. “-----” There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. “CH UNAVL” The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio. 504 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 505 Using the CD player  Type A 5 Interior features 1 Eject button 7 Playback/Pause button 2 Load button 8 Repeat play button 3 Playback button 9 Random playback button 4 Search playback button 10 Text button 5 Track selector button 11 Power 6 CD selector button 12 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 506 5-4. Using the audio system  Type B 1 Eject button 7 Repeat play button 2 Load button 8 Random playback button 3 Playback button 9 Text button 4 Track selector button 10 Power 5 CD selector button 11 Volume 6 Playback/Pause button ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 507 Loading a CD ■ Loading a CD 1 Press . “WAIT” is shown on the display. 2 When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a CD. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. ■ Loading multiple CDs 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. “WAIT” is shown on the display. 2 When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a CD. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being inserted. When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert the next CD. Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs. To cancel the operation, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 3 5 508 5-4. Using the audio system Ejecting CDs ■ Ejecting a CD 1 To select the CD to be ejected, press “” or “” on . The selected disc number is shown on the display. 2 ■ Press and remove the CD. Ejecting all the CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs. Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks ■ Selecting a track Press “” to move up or “” to move down using desired track number is displayed. ■ Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep. ■ until the Scanning tracks (type A) 1 Press . The first ten seconds of each track will be played. To cancel, press 2 again. Press the button again when the desired track is reached. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) until 5-4. Using the audio system 509 Selecting a CD ■ Selecting a CD to play To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on ■ . Scanning loaded CDs (type A) 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played. To cancel, press 2 again. Press the button again when the desired CD is reached. Playing and pausing tracks To play or pause a track, press . Random playback ■ 5 Current CD . Songs are played in random order. To cancel, press ■ again. All CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep. Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order. To cancel, press again. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Press 510 5-4. Using the audio system Repeat play ■ Repeating a track Press . To cancel, press ■ again. Repeating all of the tracks on a CD Press and hold To cancel, press until you hear a beep. again. Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  CD title  Track title ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 511 ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. ■ Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding until you hear a beep enables to display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been operated for more than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. ■ When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display “ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. ■ Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. CDs with copy-protection features may not be used. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. ■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods of time The discs may be damaged and may not play properly. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features “WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . If the CD still cannot be played back, contact your Lexus dealer. 512 5-4. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) ● Low-quality and deformed CDs ● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 513 NOTICE ■ CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 514 5-4. Using the audio system Playing MP3 and WMA discs  Type A 1 Eject button 8 Folder selector buttons 2 Load button 9 Playback/Pause button 3 Playback button 10 Repeat play button 4 Search playback button 11 Random playback button 5 File selector button 12 Text button 6 Disc selector button 13 Power 7 File selector knob 14 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system  515 Type B 5 Interior features 1 Eject button 8 Playback/Pause button 2 Load button 9 Repeat play button 3 Playback button 10 Random playback button 4 File selector button 11 Text button 5 Disc selector button 12 Power 6 File selector knob 13 Volume 7 Folder selector buttons ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 516 5-4. Using the audio system Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 507, 508 Selecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 509 Selecting and scanning a folder ■ Selecting a folder one at a time Press ■ or Returning to the first folder Press and hold ■ to select the desired folder. until you hear a beep. Scanning the first file of all the folders (type A) 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played. 2 When the desired folder is reached, press again. Fast-forwarding and reversing files To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) until 5-4. Using the audio system 517 Selecting and scanning files ■ Selecting a file Turn ■ or press “” or “” on to select the desired file. Scanning the files in a folder (type A) Press . The first ten seconds of each file will be played. To cancel, press again. When the desired file is reached, press again. Playing and pausing files To play or pause a file, press . 5 Random playback Playing files from a folder in random order Press . To cancel, press ■ again. Playing all the files from a disc in random order Press and hold To cancel, press until you hear a beep. again. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ■ 518 5-4. Using the audio system Repeat play ■ Repeating a file Press . To cancel, press ■ again. Repeating all the files in a folder Press and hold To cancel, press until you hear a beep. again. Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Folder no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 519 ■ CD player protection feature P. 511 ■ Display P. 511 ■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display “ERROR”:This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. “WAIT”:This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . If the CD still cannot be played back, contact your Lexus dealer. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD. ■ Discs that can be used P. 511 ■ Lens cleaners P. 511 ■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods 5 of time ■ MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded. ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features P. 511 520 5-4. Using the audio system ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) ● Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints. ● Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used: • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root) • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● Discs containing multi-session recordings As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 521 ● MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. ● Playback NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used P. 512 ■ CD player precautions P. 513 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. 522 5-4. Using the audio system Operating an iPod Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.  Type A 1 Playback button 6 Repeat play button 2 Song selector button 7 Shuffle playback button 3 iPod menu/Song selector knob 8 Text button 4 Go back button 9 Power 5 Playback/Pause button 10 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system  523 Type B 5 Interior features 1 Playback button 6 Repeat play button 2 Song selector button 7 Shuffle playback button 3 iPod menu/Song selector knob 8 Text button 4 Go back button 9 Power 5 Playback/Pause button 10 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 524 5-4. Using the audio system Connecting an iPod 1 Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. 2 Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on. 3 Press or ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 525 5-4. Using the audio system Selecting a play mode 1 Press 2 Turning to select iPod menu mode. changes the play mode in the following order: “PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS” “PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS” “AUDIOBOOKS” 3 Press ■ Play mode list Play mode to select the desired play mode. 5 Second selection “PLAYLISTS” Playlists select Songs select Third selection Fourth selection - - “ARTISTS” Artists select Albums select Songs select “ALBUMS” Albums select Songs select - - “SONGS” Songs select - - - - - “PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select “GENRES” Genre select “COMPOS- Composers ERS” select “AUDIOBOOKS” Songs select ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Artists select Albums select Songs select Albums select Songs select - - - - Interior features First selection 526 ■ 5-4. Using the audio system Selecting a list 1 Turn 2 Press to display the first selection list. to select the desired item. Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list. 3 Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item. To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press . Selecting songs Turn or press “” or “” on ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) to select the desired song. 5-4. Using the audio system 527 Playing and pausing songs To play or pause a song, press . Fast-forwarding and reversing songs To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep. until Shuffle playback ■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order Press . To cancel, press ■ again. Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order Press and hold until you hear a beep. To cancel, press again. Press . To cancel, press again. Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Repeat play 5 528 5-4. Using the audio system Adjusting sound quality and volume balance 1 Press 2 Pressing to enter iPod menu mode. changes sound modes. (P. 562) ■ About iPod ● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. ● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. ● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ■ iPod functions ● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. ● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. ● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead. ● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use. ● Supported models (P. 530) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 529 ■ iPod problems To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual. ■ Display P. 511 ■ Error messages “ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod. “EMPTY”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist. “UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 530 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Compatible models The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system. ● Made for • iPod touch (4th generation) • iPod touch (3rd generation) • iPod touch (2nd generation) • iPod touch (1st generation) • iPod classic • iPod with video • iPod nano (6th generation) • iPod nano (5th generation) • iPod nano (4th generation) • iPod nano (3rd generation) • iPod nano (2nd generation) • iPod nano (1st generation) • iPhone 4 • iPhone 3GS • iPhone 3G • iPhone Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: ● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999 ● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535 ● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535 CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect iPod or operate the controls. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 531 NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to iPod ● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con- nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter- minal. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 532 5-4. Using the audio system Operating a USB memory Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.  Type A 1 Playback button 6 Playback/Pause button 2 Search playback button 7 Repeat play button 3 File selector button 8 Random playback button 4 File selector knob 9 Text button 5 Folder selector buttons 10 Power 11 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system  533 Type B 5 Interior features 1 Playback button 6 Repeat play button 2 File selector button 7 Random playback button 3 File selector knob 8 Text button 4 Folder selector buttons 9 Power 5 Playback/Pause button 10 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 534 5-4. Using the audio system Connecting a USB memory 1 Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. 2 Open the cover and connect a USB memory. Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. 3 Press or ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 5-4. Using the audio system 535 Selecting and scanning a folder ■ Selecting folders one at a time Press ■ or Returning to the first folder Press and hold ■ to select the desired folder. until you hear a beep. Scanning the first file of all the folders (type A) 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played. 2 When the desired folder is reached, press again. Selecting and scanning files ■ Selecting a file 5 Turn to select the desired file. Interior features ■ or press “” or “” on Scanning the files in a folder (type A) Press . The first ten seconds of each file will be played. To cancel, press again. When the desired file is reached, press again. Playing and pausing files To play or pause a file, press . Fast-forwarding and reversing files To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) until 536 5-4. Using the audio system Random playback ■ Playing files from a folder in random order Press . To cancel, press ■ again. Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order Press and hold To cancel, press until you hear a beep. again. Repeat play ■ Repeating a file Press . To cancel, press ■ again. Repeating all the files in a folder Press and hold To cancel, press until you hear a beep. again. Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 537 ■ USB memory functions ● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. ● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory. ■ Display P. 511 ■ Error messages “ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 538 5-4. Using the audio system ■ USB memory ● Compatible devices USB memories that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback ● Compatible device formats The following device formats can be used: • USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps) • File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows) • Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root) • Maximum number of files in a device: 65025 • Maximum number of files per folder: 255 ● MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded. ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps) MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 539 ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR) ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. ● MP3 and WMA playback If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played). ● Playback • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features • When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. • When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. ● Extensions 540 5-4. Using the audio system CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to USB memories ● Do not leave USB memories in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 541 Bluetooth® audio system The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function. Title Page P. 545 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 550 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 554 Bluetooth® audio system setup P. 561 ■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the portable player is switched off ● If the portable player is not connected ● If the portable player’s battery is low ● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box ● If metal is covering or touching the portable player ■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 593) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features Using the Bluetooth® audio system 542 5-4. Using the audio system ■ About Bluetooth® The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. ■ Compatible models ● Bluetooth® specifications: Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) ● Following profiles: • A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.2) • AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3) Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player. ■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system FCC ID: AJDK018 IC ID: 775E-K018 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 543 CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). 5  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  For vehicles sold in Canada Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 544 5-4. Using the audio system CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect portable players or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to portable players Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 545 Using the Bluetooth® audio system Audio unit 1 Display A message, name, number, etc. is displayed. Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed. 2 Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) 3 Selects items such as menu and number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item Bluetooth® connection condition If “BT” is not displayed, the Bluetooth® audio system cannot be used. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 4 5 546 5-4. Using the audio system Operating the system using voice commands By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without the need to check the display or operate ■ . Operation procedure when using voice commands Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions. ■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: “Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 547 Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player: 1 Press and select “BT•A MENU” using 2 Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using . . The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard. 3 Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or 5 . Register a portable player name by either of the following methods: a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to be regis- tered. b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered. A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. 5 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 4 548 6 5-4. Using the audio system Input the passkey into the portable player. Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player. Guidance for registration completion is heard. If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® phone is heard. 7 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or (Bluetooth® phone P. 569) . Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system First menu Second menu “BT•A Setup” “Setup” “System Setup” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Third menu Operation detail “Pair Audio” Registering player a portable “Connect” Selecting a portable player to be used “Change Name” Changing the registered name of a portable player “List Audios” Listing the registered portable players “Set Passkey” Changing the passkey “Delete Audio” Deleting a registered portable player “Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume “Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Initialize” Initializing the system 5-4. Using the audio system 549 ■ When using a voice command For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine. Say the command correctly and clearly. ■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice ● When driving on rough roads ● When driving at high speeds ● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone ● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving ● Operating the system with ● Registering a portable player to the system ■ Changing the passkey P. 559 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 550 5-4. Using the audio system Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player  Type A 1 Playback button 6 Playback/Pause button 2 Search playback button 7 Repeat play button 3 Track selector button 8 Random playback button 4 BT•A menu knob 9 Text button 5 Album selector buttons 10 Power 11 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system  551 Type B 5 Interior features 1 Playback button 6 Repeat play button 2 Track selector button 7 Random playback button 3 BT•A menu knob 8 Text button 4 Album selector buttons 9 Power 5 Playback/Pause button 10 Volume ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 552 5-4. Using the audio system Selecting an album To select the desired album, press or . Selecting tracks Press “” or “” on to select the desired track. Playing and pausing tracks To play or pause a track, press . Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on you hear a beep. until Random playback Press . To cancel, press again. Repeat play Press . To cancel, press again. Scanning tracks (type A) Press . To cancel, press again. Switching the display Press . Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 553 ■ Bluetooth® audio system functions Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. ■ Display P. 511 ■ Error messages “Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 554 5-4. Using the audio system Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players: Functions and operation procedures  Pattern A To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or : ● Registering a portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” ● Selecting a portable player to be used 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing the registered name of a portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered portable players 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 555  Pattern B 1 Press 2 Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using 3 Select one of the following functions using a voice command or to select “BT•A MENU”. . . ● Registering a portable player “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” ● Selecting a portable player to be used 5 “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” Interior features ● Changing the registered name of a portable player “Change Name” ● Listing the registered portable players “List Audio Players (List Audios)” ● Changing the passkey “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered portable player “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” Registering a portable player Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 547) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) , 556 5-4. Using the audio system Selecting a portable player to be used 1 Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 2 Select the portable player to be used using  Pattern A 3 Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”, and . select “Confirm” by using a voice command or  Pattern B 3 Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using . . If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 557 Changing the registered name of a portable player 1 Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using 3 Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using 5 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . , and say Interior features the new name. . 558 5-4. Using the audio system Listing the registered portable players Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or . The list of registered portable players will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”. Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become available: ● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 559 Changing the passkey 1 Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or  Pattern A 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or  Pattern B 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number using . . . The number should be input 1 digit at a time. 3 5 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, again. If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features press 560 5-4. Using the audio system Deleting a registered portable player 1 Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 2 Select the desired portable player to be deleted using . If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the registration of the cellular phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a cellular phone is heard. 3 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or (Bluetooth® phone P. 569) ■ The number of portable players that can be registered Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 5-4. Using the audio system 561 Bluetooth® audio system setup System setup items and operation procedures  Pattern A To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or : (P. 590)  Pattern B 1 Press 2 Select “System Setup” using 3 Select one of the following items using to select “BT•A MENU”. 5 . ● Setting voice guidance volume “Guidance Vol” (P. 592) ● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Device Name” (P. 593) ● Initializing the system “Initialize” (P. 593) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features : 562 5-4. Using the audio system Optimal use of the audio system 1 Displays the current mode 2 Changes the following settings: • Sound quality and volume balance P. 563 The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce the best sound. • Automatic Sound Levelizer on/off P. 563 Adjusting sound quality and volume balance ■ Changing sound quality modes Press . Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order: “BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“ASL” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 563 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Adjusting sound quality Turning adjusts the level. Mode displayed Sound quality mode Level “BAS” Bass* -5 to 5 “MID” Mid-range* -5 to 5 “TRE” Treble* -5 to 5 “FAD” Front/rear volume balance “BAL” Left/right volume balance Turn counterTurn clockwise clockwise Low High F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right 5 *: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode. Turning clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning coun- terclockwise turns off the ASL. ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off 564 5-4. Using the audio system Using the AUX port This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. 1 Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. 2 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device. 3 Press or . ■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. ■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 565 Using the steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. 1 Radio mode:Selects a radio station CD mode: Selects a track, file (MP3 and WMA) and disc Bluetooth® audio mode: Selects a track and album iPod mode: Selects a song USB memory mode: 5 Selects a file and folder Increases/decreases volume 3 Turns the power on, selects an audio source Turning the power on Press when the audio system is turned off. The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear a beep. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 2 566 5-4. Using the audio system Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped. Type A: FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod or USB memory AMFM1 Type B: FM1FM2CD playerBluetooth® audioAUX iPod or USB memoryAMFM1 Adjusting the volume Press to increase the volume and to decrease the volume. Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume. Selecting a radio station 1 Press 2 Press to select radio mode. or to select a radio station. To scan for receivable stations, press and hold you hear a beep. To cancel, press either switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) or on the button until 5-4. Using the audio system 567 Selecting a track/file or song 1 Press mode. 2 Press to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB memory or to select the desired track/file or song. Selecting an album to select Bluetooth® audio mode. 1 Press 2 Press and hold or until you hear a beep. Selecting a folder 1 Press to select USB memory mode. 2 Press and hold or until you hear a beep. 1 Press to select CD mode. 2 Press and hold or until you hear a beep. CAUTION ■ To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Selecting a disc in the CD player 5 568 5-4. Using the audio system Hands-free system (for cellular phone) The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it. This system supports Bluetooth® cellular phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls. Title Page Using the hands-free system P. 573 Making a phone call P. 581 Setting a cellular phone P. 585 Security and system setup P. 590 Using the phone book P. 595 ■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the cellular phone is switched off ● If you are outside service range ● If the cellular phone is not connected ● If the cellular phone’s battery is low ● If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box ● If metal is covering or touching the phone ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 569 ■ When using the hands-free system ● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call. ● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear. ● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. ● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking. ● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party: • • • • • When driving on unpaved roads When driving at high speeds When a window is open When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone When the air conditioning is set to high ■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 593) ■ About Bluetooth® ■ Compatible models Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5) and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1. If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth® phone. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. 570 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Certification for the hands-free system FCC ID: AJDK018 IC ID: 775E-K018 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 571 CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). 5  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  For vehicles sold in Canada Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 572 5-4. Using the audio system CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to cellular phones Do not leave cellular phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 573 Using the hands-free system (for cellular phones) Audio unit 1 Display A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed. Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed. Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) 3 Selects speed dials 4 Selects items such as menu and number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item 5 Bluetooth® connection condition If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used. 6 Reception level ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features 2 574 5-4. Using the audio system Steering wheel switches 1 Volume During an incoming call: Adjusts the ring tone volume During an ongoing call: Adjusts the receiver volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button. 2 Talk switch Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off (press and hold) 3 Off-hook switch Turns the hands-free system on/ starts a call 4 On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ ends a call/refuses a call Microphone You can use the microphone when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers. To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in the system. (P. 576) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 575 Operating the system using voice commands By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate ■ . Operation procedure when using voice commands Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions. ■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features “Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure 576 5-4. Using the audio system Using the hands-free phone system for the first time Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration mode automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a cellular phone: 1 Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch. The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard. 2 Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or 3 Register a phone name by either of the following methods: a. Select “Record Name” using . , and say the name to be regis- tered. b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered. A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard. 5 Input the passkey into the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone. Guidance for registration completion is heard. If the cellular phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® audio player is heard. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or 6 577 . (Bluetooth® audio player P. 542) Menu list of the hands-free phone system ■ Normal operation First menu Third menu Operation detail “Callback” - - Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory “Redial” - - Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory “Add Entry” - Adding a new phone number “Change Name” - Changing the registered name in the phone book “Delete Entry” - Deleting data “Del Spd Dial” - Deleting speed dials “List Names” - Listing the registered data “Speed Dial” - Setting speed dials “Phonebook” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) the registered 5 Interior features Second menu 578 5-4. Using the audio system First menu Second menu “Security” “Phone Setup” “Setup” “System Setup” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Third menu Operation detail “Set PIN” Setting a PIN code “Phbk Lock” Locking the phone book “Phbk Unlock” Unlocking the phone book “Pair Phone” Registering the phone to be used “Connect” Selecting a cellular phone to be used “Change Name” Changing the registered name of a cellular phone “List Phones” Listing the registered cellular phones “Set Passkey” Changing the passkey “Delete Phone” Deleting a registered cellular phone “Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume “Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Initialize” Initializing the system cellular 579 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Short cut key operation Second menu Operation detail “Dial XXX (name)” - Dialing a name registered in the phone book “Phone book add Entry” - Adding a new phone number “Phone book Change name” - Changing a registered name in the phone book “Phone Entry” - Deleting the registered data “Phone book List names” - Listing data “Phone book Set Speed Dial” - Setting speed dials “Phone book Speed Dial” - Deleting speed dials 5 - Dialing by inputting a number Interior features First menu Second menu book Delete Delete “Dial XXX (number)” “Phonebook” the registered “Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking book “Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) the phone 580 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Automatic volume adjustment When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less. ■ When using a voice command For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),  (star), and + (plus). Say the command correctly and clearly. ■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice ● When driving on rough roads ● When driving at high speeds ● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone ● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving ● Operating the system with ● Registering a cellular phone to the system ■ Changing the passkey P. 588 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 581 Making a phone call Functions ■ Making a phone call ● Dialing by inputting a number “Dial by number” ● Dialing by inputting a name “Dial by name” ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory “Redial” ● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory “Call back” ■ Receiving a phone call ● Refusing a phone call ■ Transferring a phone call ■ Call waiting ■ Using the call history memory ● Dialing ● Storing number in the phone book ● Deleting ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ● Answering a phone call 5 582 5-4. Using the audio system Dialing by inputting a number 1 Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”. 2 Press the talk switch and say the phone number. 3 Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch. b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” using . Dialing by inputting a name 1 Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”. 2 Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch when the desired name is read aloud. 3 Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch. b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” using . Speed dialing 1 Press the off-hook switch. 2 Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered. 3 Press the off-hook switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 583 When receiving a phone call ■ Answering a phone call Press the off-hook switch. ■ Refusing a phone call Press the on-hook switch. Transferring a phone call A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone. b. Press the off-hook switch*1. c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2. phone to the system during a call. *2: While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone. Call waiting When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available: ● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the off- hook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between calls.) ● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch. Using the call history memory Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history memory: ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features *1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular 5 584 5-4. Using the audio system 1 Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number stored in the incoming call history memory). 2 Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed. b. Select the desired number using 3 . The following operations can be performed: Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice command or . Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or . Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or . ■ Call waiting ● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used. ● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your cellular phone and service provider. ■ Call history Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories. ■ When talking on the phone ● Do not talk at the same time as the other party. ● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 585 Setting a cellular phone Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered cellular phones: Functions and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or : ● Registering a cellular phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Pair Phone” ● Selecting a cellular phone to be used 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Connect Phone (Connect)” Interior features ● Changing the registered name of a cellular phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered cellular phones 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “List Phones” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered cellular phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Delete Phone” Registering a cellular phone Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or procedure for registering a cellular phone. (P. 576) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 , and perform the 586 5-4. Using the audio system Selecting a cellular phone to be used 1 Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired cellular phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 3 Select the cellular phone to be used using . Changing the registered name of a cellular phone 1 Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired cellular phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system  Pattern B 2 Select the desired cellular phone name to be changed using 3 Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using 587 . , and say the new name. 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . Listing the registered cellular phones Select “List Phones” using a voice command or . The list of regis- Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being read aloud selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will become available: ● Selecting a cellular phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features tered cellular phones will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”. 5 588 5-4. Using the audio system Changing the passkey 1 Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or  Pattern A 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or  Pattern B 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number using . . . The number should be input 1 digit at a time. 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again. If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary. Deleting a registered cellular phone 1 Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or  Pattern A 2 Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or . : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired cellular phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 589 5-4. Using the audio system  Pattern B 2 Select the desired cellular phone to be deleted using . If the cellular phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard. 3 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or . (Bluetooth® audio player P. 542) ■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 590 5-4. Using the audio system Security and system setup Security setting items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or : ● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number) 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN” ● Locking the phone book 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” ● Unlocking the phone book 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)” System setup items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using ● Setting voice guidance volume 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Guidance Vol” ● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Device Name” ● Initializing the system 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Initialize” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) : 591 5-4. Using the audio system Setting or changing the PIN ■ Setting a PIN 1 Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or 2 Enter a PIN using a voice command or When using ■ . . , input the code 1 digit at a time. Changing the PIN Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or 2 Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or 3 Enter a new PIN using a voice command or When using , input the code 1 digit at a time. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 5 . . Interior features 1 592 5-4. Using the audio system Locking or unlocking the phone book 1 Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or 2 . Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN. b. Input a new PIN using . Setting voice guidance volume 1 Select “Guidance Vol” using 2 Change the voice guidance volume. To decrease the volume: Turn To increase the volume: Turn ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . counterclockwise. clockwise. 5-4. Using the audio system 593 Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name 1 Select “Device Name” using 2 Turn 3 Select “Go Back” using . to display the Bluetooth® device address and name. to return to “System Setup”. Initializing the system Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using 2 Select “Confirm” again using ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . . 5 Interior features 1 594 5-4. Using the audio system ■ Initialization ● The following data in the system can be initialized: • Phone book • Outgoing and incoming call history • Speed dials • Registered cellular phone data • Security code • Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data • Passkey for the cellular phones • Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players • Guidance volume • Receiver volume • Ring tone volume ● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state. ■ When the phone book is locked The following functions cannot be used: ● Dialing by inputting a name ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory ● Using the phone book ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 595 Using the phone book Phonebook items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or : ● Adding a new phone number 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Add Entry” ● Changing the registered name in the phone book 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered data 1. “Phonebook”  2. “List Names” ● Setting speed dials 5 ● Deleting the registered data Interior features 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Entry” ● Deleting speed dials 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” Adding a new phone number The following methods can be used to add a new phone number: ● Inputting a phone number using a voice command ● Transferring data from the cellular phone ● Inputting a phone number using ● Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 596 ■ 5-4. Using the audio system Adding procedure 1 Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or . 2 Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number: Inputting a telephone number using a voice command: STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. Transferring data from the cellular phone: STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or . STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for details on transferring data. STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. b. Select the desired data using ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 5-4. Using the audio system Inputting a phone number using 597 : STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using STEP2-2 Input a phone number using . , and press again. Input the phone number 1 digit at a time. Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history: STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or . 5 STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command . STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. b. Select the desired data using ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . Interior features or 598 5-4. Using the audio system 3 Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Select “Record Name” using 4 and say the desired name. Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . In 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-4. Using the audio system 599 Changing the registered name in the phone book 1 Select “Change Name” using a voice command or  Pattern A 2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or . : a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 5 Select the desired name to be changed using . 3 Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using the new name. 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . and say Interior features 2 600 5-4. Using the audio system Listing the registered data Select “List Names” using a voice command or . The list of the registered data will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”. Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following function will become available: ● Dialing: “Dial” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry” ● Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” Setting speed dials 1 Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 2 Select the desired data using ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 5-4. Using the audio system 3 601 Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or . b. Press and hold the desired preset button. Deleting the registered data 1 Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or .  Pattern A 2 Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone number. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch.  Pattern B 2 Select the desired data to be deleted using ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . Interior features select “Confirm” using a voice command or 5 602 5-4. Using the audio system Deleting speed dials 1 Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or . 2 Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered and select “Confirm” using a voice command or ■ Limitation of number of digits A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) . 5-5. Using the interior lights 603 Interior lights list 5 Outer foot lights 5 Rear personal lights (P. 604) 2 Shift lever light 6 Door courtesy lights 3 Interior light 7 Ornament lights (if equipped) 4 Front personal lights 8 Footwell lights (P. 604) (P. 604) When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum and the tail lights are on, the ornament lights and the footwell lights will turn off. (P. 94) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features 1 604 5-5. Using the interior lights Interior light 1 Turns the light on/off The rear personal lights are also turned on/off by the interior light operation. However, if the interior light is turned off after being turned on while the rear personal lights are turned on, the rear personal lights will not turn off simultaneously. 2 Turns the door position on Personal lights ■ Front Turns the light on/off ■ Rear Turns the light on/off If the lights are turned on by interior light operation, the lights cannot turn off by pressing the switch. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-5. Using the interior lights 605 ■ Illuminated entry system The lights automatically turn on/off according to “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the personal/ interior light main switch is in the door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes: ● Outer foot lights ● Personal/interior light ● Door courtesy lights ● Ornament lights (if equipped) ● Footwell lights ■ Customization Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 606 5-6. Using the storage features List of storage features 1 Cup holders 2 Glove box (P. 610) 3 Console box (P. 609) (P. 608) 4 Auxiliary box (P. 611) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-6. Using the storage features 607 CAUTION ■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: ● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. ● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard. ■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use Keep the lids closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 608 5-6. Using the storage features Glove box 1 Open (press the button) 2 Unlock with the mechanical key 3 Lock with the mechanical key ■ Glove box light The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on. ■ Trunk opener main switch The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 145) ■ Removing the insert The insert inside the glove box can be removed. (P. 708) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-6. Using the storage features 609 Console box Push the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open fully. ■ Tray in the console box The tray slides forward/backward and can be removed. 5 The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on. CAUTION When using the console box with half-open, do not apply too much load on the armrest. Doing so may damage the armrest and may cause you to injure yourself. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ■ Console box light 610 5-6. Using the storage features Cup holders ■ ■ Driver’s side 1 To open, move the cup holder lid until it locks. 2 To close, press and release the cup holder lid. Front passenger’s side To open, press down and release the cup holder lid. ■ Rear To open, pull down the armrest and press in and release the rear cup holder on the armrest. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-6. Using the storage features 611 CAUTION ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder (front passenger’s side) Do not place anything larger than a 32 oz cup in the cup holder. Doing so may prevent the switches from being operated properly or block the driver’s view of the switches, which may cause an accident. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holder Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest. Auxiliary box ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Press in the button. 5 612 5-6. Using the storage features Trunk features Cargo hooks Raise the hooks when needed. The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items. Grocery bag hooks Luggage mat 1 Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-6. Using the storage features 2 613 The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk. CAUTION ■ When the cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions. NOTICE ■ When closing the trunk Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features The luggage mat may get damaged. 5 614 5-7. Other interior features Sun visors and vanity mirrors Sun visors 1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down. 2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side. 3 To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward. Vanity mirrors Slide the cover to open. The light turns on when the cover is opened. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is not running . ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 615 Clock The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons. 1 Pressing and holding will move the clock hands backward. 2 Pressing and holding will move the clock hands forward. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 616 5-7. Other interior features Power outlets The power outlets can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than 10A. ■ Front Open the lid. ■ Rear Open the lid. ■ The power outlets can be used when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 617 NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the power outlets Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent blown fuse Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V 10A. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running . 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 618 5-7. Other interior features Heated steering wheel The heated steering wheel heats the side grips of the steering wheel. Turns the heater on/off The indicator light comes on when the heater is operating. ■ Operating condition The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Timer The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes. ■ If the indicator light flashes Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 619 CAUTION ■ Burns Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on: ● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged ● Persons with sensitive skin ● Persons who are fatigued ● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Turn the switch off when the engine is not running . 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 620 5-7. Other interior features Seat heaters/seat ventilators The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats. Seat heaters Heats the seat The indicator light comes on. The higher the number of dots, the warmer the seat becomes. Seat heaters and ventilators 1 Heats the seat The indicator light comes on. The higher the number of dots, the warmer the seat becomes. 2 Blows air from the seat The indicator light comes on. The higher the number of dots, the stronger the airflow becomes. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 621 ■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION ■ Burns ● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. ● Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating. ■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Turn the seat heaters/seat ventilators off when the engine is not running . ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features NOTICE 5 622 5-7. Other interior features Armrest Fold down the armrest for use. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the armrest Do not apply too much load on the armrest. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 623 Rear sunshade/rear door sunshades Rear sunshade The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the button shown below. Raise/lower 5 Interior features Rear door sunshades Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade and hook the shade on using the anchors. To retract the rear door sunshade, unhook the shade and retract it slowly. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 624 5-7. Other interior features ■ The rear sunshade can be used when The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Operating the rear sunshade after the engine is turned off The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. ■ Reverse operation feature To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to R. However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs: ● The button is pressed again.* ● Shift the shift lever into P. ● The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). If the engine is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the button. *: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has been pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function. ■ Customization Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 852) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 625 CAUTION ■ When the rear sunshade is being operated Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening. They may get caught, causing injury. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running . ■ To ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades Observe the following precautions. ● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sun- shade. ● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations. ● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades. 5 ● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features ● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time. 626 5-7. Other interior features Trunk storage extension Long objects can be loaded into the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area. 1 Fold down the armrest. 2 Fold down the handle and open the armrest door. CAUTION ■ When not in use Ensure that the armrest door is closed. In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury. : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 627 Coat hooks The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips. CAUTION ■ Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 628 5-7. Other interior features Assist grips An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat. CAUTION ■ Assist grip Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the assist grip Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 629 Garage door opener The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices. The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink®. Programming the HomeLink® The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device. Indicator light 2 Buttons ■ Before programming HomeLink® ● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm. ● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote con- trol transmitter for more accurate programming. ● Garage door openers manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you will need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features 1 630 ■ 5-7. Other interior features Programming HomeLink® 1 Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons. Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.  For U.S.A. owner’s 2 Press and hold the ® HomeLink button you want to program and the handheld transmitter button simultaneously. When the ® HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons. Programming has completed when the indicator light changes to a rapid flash.  Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market 2 With one hand, press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program. With your other hand, press and release the remote control transmitter every 2 seconds and repeat this cycle until the HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly. Then, release the buttons. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 3 631 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light: ● If the indicator light is solid/ continuous, programming has been completed and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. ● If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns into a solid/continuous light, proceed with the following instructions 4 for programming a rolling code system. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 632 5-7. Other interior features  Programming a rolling code system 4 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor in the garage. This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Please refer to the operator’s manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details. 5 Press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. Perform 6 within 30 seconds after performing 5 . 6 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button (located inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/ hold/release) up to 3 times to complete programming. If the garage door opener motor activates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink® signal. 7 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features ■ 633 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten: 1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. 2 When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing, continue to hold the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” from 1 (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing). Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs) Press and hold the 2 outside buttons shown in the illustration for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 634 5-7. Other interior features ■ Programs stored in the HomeLink® memory ● The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is discon- nected. ● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code is not erased. ■ Certification for the garage door opener  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4 FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ■ When support is necessary Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 635 CAUTION ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. ■ Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. ■ When operating or programming HomeLink® Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 636 5-7. Other interior features Compass The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. Operation To turn the compass on or off, push the switch. Displays and directions Display Direction “N” North “NE” Northeast “E” East “SE” Southeast “S” South “SW” Southwest “W” West “NW” Northwest : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 637 Calibrating the compass The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”. 638 ■ 5-7. Other interior features Deviation calibration 1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle. 2 Press the switch until a number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display. 3 Press the switch and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are. If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete. ■ Circling calibration When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 639 ■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: ● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. ● The vehicle is on an inclined surface. ● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.). ● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.) ● The 12-volt battery has been disconnected. ● A door is open. CAUTION ■ While driving the vehicle Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. 5 ■ When doing the circling calibration ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration. 640 5-7. Other interior features NOTICE ■ To avoid the compass malfunctions Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction. ■ To ensure normal operation of the compass ● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields. ● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 641 Safety Connect Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles. By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions. 5 System components “SOS” button 2 LED light indicators 3 Microphone Interior features 1 : If equipped ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 642 5-7. Other interior features Services Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available: ● Automatic Collision Notification* Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 644) *: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2 ● Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 645) ● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”) Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 645) ● Enhanced Roadside Assistance Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 645) Subscription After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 643 ■ Safety Connect Services Information ● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect. ● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected. ● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Loca- tion will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada. ● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible. ■ Languages ■ When contacting the response center You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 Interior features The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling. 644 5-7. Other interior features Safety Connect LED light Indicators When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active. The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions: ● Green indicator light on = Active service ● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process ● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Lexus dealer) ● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active Safety Connect services ■ Automatic Collision Notification In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features ■ 645 Stolen Vehicle Location If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com. ■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”) In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required. ■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service. Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Interior features If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency. 5 646 5-7. Other interior features Safety information for Safety Connect Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect. ■ Exposure to radio frequency signals The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies. ● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] ● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure- ment) Report 86 [1986] ● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro- tection) [1996] Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5-7. Other interior features 647 ■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect FCC ID: O9EGTM1 FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101 FCC ID: N7NGTM2 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5 Interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 648 5-7. Other interior features ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 649 Maintenance and care 6 6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.................650 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior..................654 6-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements............................. 657 General maintenance..............660 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ....................................664 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions................................665 Hood ...............................................669 Positioning a floor jack............. 670 Engine compartment ................673 12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles) ......................690 Tires.................................................. 694 Tire inflation pressure ............... 703 Wheels ........................................... 706 Air conditioning filter ...............708 Electronic key battery............... 710 Checking and replacing fuses................................................712 Light bulbs......................................724 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 650 6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition: ● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. ● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Wipe away any water. ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. ■ Automatic car washes ● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving. ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. ● Hybrid vehicles: Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle. ■ High pressure car washes ● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the win- dows. ● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-1. Maintenance and care 651 ■ When using a car wash If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle: ● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) ● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 129) ■ Aluminum wheels ● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. ● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather. ● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use. ■ Bumpers and side moldings Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 652 6-1. Maintenance and care CAUTION ■ When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire. ■ When cleaning the windshield (with rain-sensing windshield wipers) Turn off the wiper switch. If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades. Off ● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand ● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor ● If something bumps against the windshield ● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor ■ Precautions regarding exhaust pipes Exhaust gases cause exhaust pipes to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch any pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns. ■ Precaution regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped) If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-1. Maintenance and care 653 NOTICE ■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu- minum wheels etc.) ● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • • • • After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface • After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights ● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. ● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. 6 ■ When using an automatic car wash (with rain-sensing windshield wipers) ■ When cleaning the windshield Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 329) Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care Turn off the wiper switch. If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. 654 6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition: Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. Cleaning the leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining mois- ture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area. Cleaning the synthetic leather areas ● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. ● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. ● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-1. Maintenance and care 655 ■ Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. ■ Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. ■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc. If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged. CAUTION ■ Water in the vehicle ● Gasoline vehicles: Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire. ● Hybrid vehicles: Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor ● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 40) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care and in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents or in the luggage compartment. Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire. 6 656 6-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents ● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte- rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces: • Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach • Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol ● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged. ■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces: ● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. ● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. ■ Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust. ■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LDA [Lane Departure Alert] and Automatic High Beam) Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (P. 269). If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LDA and Automatic High Beam system may not operate properly or may cause a malfunction. ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window ● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna. ● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-2. Maintenance 657 Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends performing the following maintenance: General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer. Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”. Do-it-yourself maintenance The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. 6 658 6-2. Maintenance ■ Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. ■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only) After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data. To reset the data, follow the procedure described below: 1 Switch the display to the trip meter “A” (P. 94) when the engine is running . 2 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. 3 While pressing the “ODO TRIP” button (P. 94), turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to the IGNITION ON mode (do not start the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be canceled). The message shown in the illustration will appear on the display. Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”. ■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer ● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. ● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been per- formed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-2. Maintenance 659 CAUTION ■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury. ■ Handling of the 12-volt battery ● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com- ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. ● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo- nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. ● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 685, 690) 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 660 6-2. Maintenance General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice. Engine compartment Items Check points 12-volt battery (gasoline vehicles) Check the battery fluid level and connections. (P. 685) Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (P. 684) Engine coolant (gasoline vehicles) Is the engine coolant at the correct level? (P. 681) Engine/power control unit coolant Is the engine/power control unit coolant (hybrid vehicles) at the correct level? (P. 681) Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (P. 676) Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or strange sounds. Radiator/condenser The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (P. 683) Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid? (P. 689) Luggage compartment Items 12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Check points Check the connections. (P. 690) 6-2. Maintenance 661 Vehicle interior Items Accelerator pedal Check points • The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching). Automatic transmission “Park” mecha• When parked on a slope and the shift nism (gasoline vehicles)/Hybrid translever is in P, is the vehicle securely mission “Park” mechanism (hybrid stopped? vehicles) Brakes • The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied. • The brakes should work effectively. • The brake pedal should not feel spongy. • The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care Brake pedal • Does the brake pedal move smoothly? • Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? (P. 834) • Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? (P. 834) 662 6-2. Maintenance Items Check points Head restraints • Do the head restraints smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? • Are the headlights aimed correctly? Parking brake • Does the parking brake pedal move smoothly? brake pedal move smoothly? • When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped? Seat belts • Do the seat belts operate smoothly? • The seat belts should not be damaged. Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? Steering wheel • Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly? • Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play? • There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) move 6-2. Maintenance 663 Vehicle exterior Items Check points Doors/trunk • Do the smoothly? doors/trunk operate Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock system work properly? Fluid leaks • There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked. Tires • Is the tire inflation pressure correct? • The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn. • Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • The wheel nuts should not be loose. CAUTION ■ If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 664 6-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations: ● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. ● When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 665 Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections. Items 12-volt battery condition (gasoline vehicles) 12-volt battery condition (hybrid vehicles) Brake fluid level Parts and tools (P. 685) (P. 690) (P. 684) • • • • Warm water Baking soda Grease Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) • Distilled water • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, nonEngine coolant level nitrite and non-borate coolant with (gasoline vehicles) (P. 681) long-life hybrid organic acid technology For the U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: Engine/power control unit coolant level “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is (hybrid vehicles) (P. 681) pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding coolant) 6 666 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools Engine oil level (P. 676) • “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding engine oil) Fuses (P. 712) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original Light bulbs (P. 724) • Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original • Phillips-head screwdriver • Flathead screwdriver • Wrench Radiator and condenser (P. 683) Tire inflation pressure (P. 703) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source (P. 689) • Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid) Washer fluid ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 667 CAUTION The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■ When working on the engine compartment ● Hybrid vehicles: Make sure that the “POWER ON” on the multi-information dis- play and the “READY” indicator are both off. ● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. ● Gasoline vehicles: Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ● Hybrid vehicles: Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment. ● Gasoline vehicles: Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the 12-volt battery. Fuel and 12-volt battery fumes are flammable. ● Hybrid vehicles: Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable. ● Gasoline vehicles: Be extremely cautious when working on the 12-volt battery. It 6 contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 668 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille Be sure the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is off. With the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 683) ■ Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes. NOTICE ■ If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 669 Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. 1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. 2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. 6 ■ Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care CAUTION 670 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Positioning a floor jack When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. ◆ Front  Gasoline vehicles  Hybrid vehicles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 671 ◆ Rear  Gasoline vehicles  Hybrid vehicles 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 672 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When raising your vehicle Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury: ● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration. ● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack. ● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. ● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported only by the floor jack. ● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface. ● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. ● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. ● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. ● When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the floor jack. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 673 Engine compartment Gasoline vehicles (2GR-FE engine) 1 Washer fluid tank (P. 689) 2 Engine oil filler cap 3 5 Brake fluid reservoir (P. 684) 6 (P. 678) 6 Fuse box Engine oil level dipstick (P. 676) 7 12-volt battery 8 Electric cooling fans 9 Condenser (P. 683) 10 Radiator (P. 683) Maintenance and care  4 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 681) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) (P. 712) (P. 685) 674 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance  Hybrid vehicles (2AR-FXE engine) 1 Washer fluid tank (P. 689) 2 Fuse boxes 3 6 Engine coolant reservoir (P. 681) Power control unit coolant reservoir (P. 681) 7 Brake fluid reservoir (P. 684) 4 Engine oil level dipstick (P. 676) 8 Power control unit coolant radiator (P. 683) 5 Engine oil filler cap 9 Electric cooling fans 10 Condenser 11 Engine coolant radiator (P. 683) (P. 712) (P. 678) ■ 12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles) P. 690 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) (P. 683) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 675 Engine compartment cover ■ Removing the engine compartment cover ■ Installing the clips 1 Push up center portion 2 Insert 3 Press 6 ■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care NOTICE 676 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Checking the engine oil 1 Park the vehicle on level ground.  Gasoline vehicles After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.  Hybrid vehicles After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. 2  Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out. Gasoline vehicles 3 Wipe the dipstick clean. 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  Hybrid vehicles 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5  Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Gasoline vehicles  Hybrid vehicles 1 Low 1 Low 2 Full 2 Measuring side 3 Full 6 677 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 678 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.  Gasoline vehicles  Hybrid vehicles Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Engine oil selection P. 830 Oil quantity (Low  Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.) Items Clean funnel 1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. 2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 679 ■ Engine oil consumption A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. ● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine ● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used ● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently ● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic CAUTION ■ Used engine oil ● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. ● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis- ● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. 680 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis. ■ When replacing the engine oil ● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. ● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 681 Coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. ■ Engine coolant reservoir 1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” line 3 “LOW” line If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (P. 813, 816) ■ Power control unit coolant reservoir (hybrid vehicles) 1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” line 3 “LOW” line ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. (P. 816) 682 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Coolant selection Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C]) For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. NOTICE ■ When adding coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 683 Radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 684 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.  Gasoline vehicles ■ Adding fluid  Hybrid vehicles Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item. Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Items Clean funnel ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. CAUTION ■ When filling the reservoir Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 685 NOTICE ■ If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem. 12-volt battery (gasoline vehicles) Check the 12-volt battery as follows. ■ 12-volt battery exterior Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. 1 Terminals 2 Hold-down clamp 6 Checking 12-volt battery fluid Check that the level is between the “UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER LEVEL” lines. 1 “UPPER LEVEL” line 2 “LOWER LEVEL” line If the fluid level is at or below the “LOWER LEVEL” line, add distilled water. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ■ 686 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Adding distilled water 1 Remove the vent plug. 2 Add distilled water. Low O.K. If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking directly at the cell. 3 Put the vent plug back on and close it securely. ■ Before recharging When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging: ● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ● Make sure the “START STOP ENGINE” switch on the charger is off when con- necting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 687 ■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. 1 Shift the shift lever to P. 2 Open and close any of the doors. 3 Restart the engine. ● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors. ● Start the engine with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt. ● The “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown. If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery ● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. ● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: 6 688 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation. ■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. NOTICE ■ When recharging the 12-volt battery Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. ■ When adding distilled water Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during 12-volt battery recharging may cause corrosion. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 689 Washer fluid If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. CAUTION ■ When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc. NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid ■ Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces. 6 690 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles) Location The 12-volt battery is located on the right-hand side of luggage compartment. Removing the 12-volt battery cover Remove the 12-volt battery cover. Installing the 12-volt battery cover 1 Install the cover 2 Lift the tab to secure to the trunk liner ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 691 Exterior Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. 1 Terminals 2 Hold-down clamp ■ Before recharging When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging: ● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ● Make sure the “POWER” switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis- connecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery. 6 ■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery 1 Shift the shift lever to P. 2 Open and close any of the doors. 3 Restart the hybrid system. ● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors. ● Start the hybrid system with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the “POWER” switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt. ● The “POWER” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon- nected, the vehicle will return the “POWER” switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the “POWER” switch before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12volt battery if the “POWER” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown. If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ● The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. 692 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12volt battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. ● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery. ■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation. ■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 693 CAUTION ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion. For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer. 6 NOTICE Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ■ When recharging the 12-volt battery 694 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear. Checking tires 1 New tread 2 Treadwear indicator 3 Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated. Tire rotation Rotate the tires in the order shown.  Vehicles with compact spare tire Front  Vehicles with full-size spare tire Front To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 695 Tire pressure warning system Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. ● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (P. 775) ● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 101) ◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 697) ◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: ● When rotating the tires. ● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight. When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ■ 6 696 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance How to initialize the tire pressure warning system 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 835) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. 3 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode. 4 Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times. 5 Wait for a few minutes with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNITION ON mode and then turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 697 ◆ Registering ID codes The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or loca- tion of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. ■ Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction. ■ Tire life ■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. ■ When rotating the tires Make sure that the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the tire position information will not be updated. If this accidentally occurs, either turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to off and then to IGNITION ON mode, or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. 6 698 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Low profile tires (P225/45R18 tires) Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions. ■ Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 840) ■ Tire types ● Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. ● All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. ● Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 326) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 699 ■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost. ■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly ● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. • • • • • • • • If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire. A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size. Tire chains etc. are equipped. Lock nuts are equipped. An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped. If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings. • If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level. • If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.* • If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the trunk.* *: Vehicles with a full-size spare tire only ● Performance may be affected in the following situations. ● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended. ● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care • Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise • When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions. 700 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ The initialization operation ● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment. ● If you have accidentally turned the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time. ● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again. ■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times. ● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes. ■ Tire pressure warning system certification MODEL/FCC IDs: Transmitter: PAXPMVC010 Initiator: HYQ22AAA  For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. Note: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  For vehicles sold in Canada Note: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 701 CAUTION ■ When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. ● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. ● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). ● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. ● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. ● Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire (if equipped) installed. ■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices diac defibrillators should not come within 17.7 in. (450 mm) of the tire pressure warning system initiators. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ● People with implanted pacemakers or car- 6 702 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps ● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound. ● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci- fied. The cap may become stuck. ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 695) ■ Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. ■ Low profile tires (P225/45R18 tires) Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following: ● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely. ● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage. ■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 703 Tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 835) 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 704 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Inspection and adjustment procedure 1 Tire valve 2 Tire pressure gauge 1 Remove the tire valve cap. 2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. 3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations. 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate. 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. 6 Put the tire valve cap back on. ■ Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. ■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ● Reduced fuel efficiency ● Reduced driving comfort and tire life ● Reduced safety ● Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 705 ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ● Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ● Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling. ● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pres- sure to be higher after driving. ● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. CAUTION ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury: ● Excessive wear ● Uneven wear ● Poor handling 6 ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation ● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards NOTICE ■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as possible. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ● Poor sealing of the tire bead 706 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control. Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as “offset”. Lexus does not recommend using the following: ● Wheels of different sizes or types ● Used wheels ● Bent wheels that have been straightened Aluminum wheel precautions ● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. ● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. ● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 707 ■ When replacing wheels The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 695) CAUTION ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control. ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters ● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. 6 708 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. Removal method 1 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. 2 Open the glove box. Lift and remove the partition. 3 Remove the glove box cover. 4 Remove the filter cover. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5 709 Slide and pull out the filter. Replace it with a new one. The “UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up. ■ Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.) ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. NOTICE ■ When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 710 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. You will need the following items: ● Flathead screwdriver ● Small flathead screwdriver ● Lithium battery CR2032 Replacing the battery 1 Take out the mechanical key. 2 Remove the cover. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 711 ■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery ● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores. ● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. ● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws. ■ If the electronic key battery is depleted The following symptoms may occur: ● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. ● The operational range will be reduced. CAUTION ■ Removed battery and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery ● Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery terminals. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: 6 712 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. 1 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. 2 After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” for details about which fuse to check. (P. 715) 3 Open the Fuse box cover.  Engine compartment (type A fuse box) Push the tab in and lift the lid off.  Engine compartment (type B fuse box) (hybrid vehicles only) Push the tab in and lift the lid off. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance  713 Driver’s side instrument panel Remove the lid. 4 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 714 5 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Check if the fuse is blown. 1 Normal fuse 2 Blown fuse Type A and B: Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type C: Contact your Lexus dealer.  Type A  Type C ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  Type B 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 715 Fuse layout and amperage ratings ■ Engine compartment (type A fuse box) ● Fuse block ● Fuse block on the back of the cover 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 716 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse 1 Ampere WIP-S 5 Circuit Driver support system, windshield wipers 2 FAN 50 Electric cooling fan 3 H-LP CLN 30 No circuit 4 ENG W/PMP*1 30 Cooling system 5 PTC HTR NO.2 50 PTC heater 6 PTC HTR NO.1 50 PTC heater 7 HTR 50 Air conditioning system 140 Charging system 120 Hybrid system 9 ABS NO.2*2 30 VSC, ABS ST/AM2*2 30 Starting system ABS NO.1*1 30 VSC, ABS 11 H-LP-MAIN 8 10 ALT* 2 DC/DC* 1 30 H-LP RH-LO, H-LP LH-LO ABS MTR NO.2*1 50 VSC, ABS ABS NO.1*2 50 VSC, ABS ABS MTR NO.1*1 50 VSC, ABS R/B NO.2*1 50 IGCT MAIN, INV W/PMP 15 EPS 80 Electric power steering 16 S-HORN 7.5 S-HORN 17 DEICER 15 Windshield deicer 18 HORN 10 Horn 19 TV 15 Multi-information display, audio display, Remote Touch, audio system, gauges and meters 20 AMP NO.2 30 Audio system 21 EFI NO.2 15 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, electronic controlled transmission 12 13 14 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse 717 Circuit 10*2 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, air intake system, exhaust system 7.5*1 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, air intake system 7.5 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system 24 ECU-IG2 NO.3 7.5 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, electronic controlled transmission, power management system, steering lock system, cruise control system 25 IGN 15 Starting system 26 D/L-AM2 25 Power door lock system 27 IG2-MAIN 25 INJ, IGN 7.5 Charging system 7.5 Hybrid system 29 MAYDAY 5 MAYDAY 30 TURN&HAZ 15 Turn signal lights, emergency flashers 31 STRG LOCK 10 Steering lock system 32 AMP 30 Audio system 33 H-LP LH-LO 15 Left-hand headlight 34 H-LP RH-LO 15 Right-hand headlight 35 EFI-MAIN NO.1 30 EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, fuel system 36 SMART 5 Smart access system with push-button start, occupant classification system 37 ETCS 10 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system 38 ABS NO.2*1 7.5 VSC, ABS 39 EFI NO.1 7.5 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, electronic controlled transmission 22 EFI NO.3 23 INJ 28 ALT-S*2 DC/DC-S* 1 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care Ampere 718 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse A/F* Ampere 2 Circuit 20 Air intake system 40 EFI-MAIN NO.2*1 20 Fuel system, air intake system, exhaust system 41 AM2 7.5 Power management system, smart access system with push-button start 42 PANEL 10 Switch illumination, audio system, multi-information display, audio display, shift lever light, glove box light, console box light, Remote Touch, intuitive parking assist switch illumination 43 DOME 7.5 Clock, footwell lights, vanity lights, ornament lights, personal lights, door courtesy lights 44 ECU-B NO.1 10 Smart access system with push-button start, main body ECU, steering sensor, gauges and meters, gateway ECU, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, power seats, overhead module, outside mirror control ECU, power trunk opener and closer ECU 45 SPARE 25 Spare fuse 46 SPARE 30 Spare fuse *1: Hybrid vehicles *2: Gasoline vehicles ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ 719 Engine compartment (type B fuse box) (hybrid vehicles only) Fuse 1 Ampere BATT FAN Circuit Battery cooling fan 2 INV W/PMP RLY 7.5 INV W/PMP RLY 3 DC/DC IGCT 10 Hybrid system 4 INV 7.5 Hybrid system 5 BATT VL SSR 10 Hybrid system 6 PM IGCT 7.5 Power management system, hybrid system 7 IGCT-MAIN 25 INV W/PMP RLY, INV, DC/DC IGCT, BATT VL SSR, PM IGCT, BATT FAN 8 INV W/PMP 15 Hybrid system ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care 7.5 720 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Driver’s side instrument panel Fuse Ampere Circuit 10 Main body ECU, audio system, shift lock system, outside mirror control ECU, tension reducer, windshield wipers, heated steering wheel, multi-information display, audio display, intuitive parking assist, tire pressure warning system, moon roof, auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror, raindrop sensor, rear sunshade, wireless door lock system, power trunk opener and closer ECU 2 ECU-IG1 NO.1 10 FAN, DEICER, VSC, ABS, charging system, steering sensor, electronic controlled transmission, electric power steering, gateway ECU, electric tilt and telescopic steering column 3 PANEL NO.2 5 Clock 4 TAIL 15 Parking lights, side marker lights, license plate lights 5 DOOR F/R 20 Power window, outside mirror control ECU 6 DOOR R/R 20 Power window 7 DOOR F/L 20 Power window, outside mirror control ECU 8 DOOR R/L 20 Power window 9 H-LP LVL 7.5 Automatic headlight leveling system 10 WASHER 10 Windshield washer 11 A/C-IG1 7.5 Air conditioning system, PTC heater, gauges and meters, seat heaters and ventilators 1 ECU-IG1 NO.2 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere 12 WIPER 721 Circuit 25 Windshield wipers 13 BKUP LP 7.5 Multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, electronic controlled transmission, audio system, navigation system, back-up lights 14 FUEL OPN 10 Fuel filler door opener 15 EPS-IG1 10 Electric power steering 16 P/OUTLET RR 15 Power outlet 17 RADIO-ACC 5 Audio system, Remote Touch, multi-information display, audio display, navigation system 18 S/HTR&FAN F/R 10 Seat heaters and ventilators 19 S/HTR&FAN F/L 10 Seat heaters and ventilators 20 OBD 7.5 On-Board diagnosis system 10 Power window master switch, air conditioning system, smart access system with pushbutton start, tire pressure warning system, rear sunshade 21 ECU-B NO.2 10 Heated steering wheel 23 PTL 25 Power trunk opener and closer ECU 24 STOP 7.5 Power management system, multiport fuel injection system, sequential multiport fuel system, VSC, ABS, electronic controlled transmission, driver support system, engine room junction block assy, tail lights, high mounted stoplight, smart access system with push-button start, shift lock system 25 P/SEAT F/L 30 Power seats 26 A/C-B 7.5 Air conditioning system 27 S/ROOF 10 Moon roof 28 P/SEAT F/R 30 Power seats 29 PSB 30 Pre-collision seat belt 30 D/L-AM1 20 Main body ECU ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care 22 STRG HTR 6 722 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 31 TI&TE 20 Electric tilt and telescopic steering column 32 A/B 10 Occupant classification system, SRS airbag system 33 ECU-IG2 NO.1 7.5 Gauges and meters 34 ECU-IG2 NO.2 7.5 VSC, ABS, gateway ECU, smart access system with push-button start, SRS airbag system 35 CIG& P/OUTLET 15 Power outlet 36 ECU-ACC 7.5 Main body ECU, gauges and meters, outside rear view mirrors 37 ECU-IG1 NO.3 10 Intuitive parking assist, driver support system, skid control buzzer, Blind Spot Monitor, radar sensor 38 S/HTR RR 20 No circuit ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 723 ■ After a fuse is replaced ● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 724) ● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If there is an overload in a circuit The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage. ■ When replacing light bulbs Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, nongenuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable. CAUTION ■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. 6 ● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes. ■ Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care NOTICE 724 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer. Preparing for light bulb replacement Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 836) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 725 Bulb locations ■ ■ Front 1 Front side marker light 4 Headlight high beam 2 Front turn signal light 5 Fog light 3 Headlight low beam (halogen bulb) 6 Rear Maintenance and care 1 Back-up light ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 2 Rear turn signal light 726 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Replacing light bulbs ■ Headlight high beam 1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 2 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release. 3 Exchange the light bulb, and install the bulb base. Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. 4 Turn and secure the bulb base. Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ 727 Headlight low beam (halogen bulb) 1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 2 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release. 3 Exchange the light bulb, and install the bulb base. Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn and secure the bulb base. Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care 4 6 728 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fog lights 1 Remove the bolt and partly remove the under cover, and unplug the connector while pushing the lock release. 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 3 Set the new light bulb. Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn it clockwise to set. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 729 Set the connector. After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the fog lights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 730 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Front turn signal lights 1 To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb to be replaced. Remove the 3 fender liner clips and 1 screw. Turn the steering wheel to the left when replacing the right side light bulb, and turn the steering wheel to the right when replacing the left side light bulb. To take out the clips, turn the head of the clip to unlock, then remove by pulling. 2 While holding the clamp open, pull and remove the tabs and open the fender liner. 3 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Remove the light bulb. 5 When installing, reverse the steps listed. 731 After installing the bulb base, reinstall the fender liner and install the clips and screw. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 732 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Front side marker lights 1 Partly remove the fender liner. Perform the procedure for “Front turn signal lights” from step 1 to 2. (P. 730) 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 3 Remove the code from clip. 4 Remove the light bulb. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5 733 When installing, reverse the steps listed. After installing the bulb base, reinstall the fender liner and install the clips and screw. 6 Maintenance and care ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 734 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Rear turn signal lights 1 Open the trunk lid and remove the cover. 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 3 Remove the light bulb. 4 When installing, reverse the steps listed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ 735 Back-up lights 1 Open the trunk lid. 2 For the left side (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer only): Pry out each side of the trunk closer switch in turn by inserting a screwdriver into the base. To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Remove the clips on whichever side you are replacing and open the cover of the trunk lid. 4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. When installing, pass the wire around the connector rib and make sure that it does not rest on top of the connector rib. 5 6 Remove the light bulb. When installing, reverse the steps listed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 Connector rib Maintenance and care 3 736 ■ 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Replacing the following bulbs If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. ● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs) ● Parking lights and daytime running lights ● Side turn signal lights ● Stop/tail lights ● Tail lights ● Rear side marker lights ● High mounted stoplight ● License plate lights ● Outer foot lights ■ Discharge headlights (if equipped) If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored. ■ LED lights The lights other than the headlights, fog lights, front turn signal lights, front side marker lights, rear turn signal lights, back-up lights and outer foot lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced. ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. ● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens. ● Water has built up inside the headlight. ■ When replacing light bulbs P. 723 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 737 CAUTION ■ Replacing light bulbs ● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. ● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack. ● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens. ■ Discharge headlights (if equipped) ● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including light bulbs). ● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 25000 V will be discharged and could result in death or serious injury by electric shock. ● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury. ● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. ● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Maintenance and care ■ To prevent damage or fire 6 738 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 739 When trouble arises 7-1. Essential information Emergency flashers................... 740 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ......741 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed.................................743 If you think something is wrong.................749 Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline vehicles)..................750 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds.......751 If a warning message is displayed .................................. 761 If you have a flat tire................... 784 If the engine will not start (gasoline vehicles)...................797 If the hybrid system will not start (hybrid vehicles)............ 799 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ......................801 If the electronic key does not operate properly .....................802 If the 12-volt battery is discharged (gasoline vehicles)..................................... 805 If the 12-volt battery is discharged (hybrid vehicles)..................................... 809 If your vehicle overheats (gasoline vehicles)................... 813 If your vehicle overheats (hybrid vehicles) ....................... 816 If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................................820 740 7-1. Essential information Emergency flashers The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc. Press the switch. All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.  Type A  Type B ■ Emergency flashers Gasoline vehicles: If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the 12-volt battery may discharge. Hybrid vehicles: If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-1. Essential information 741 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure: 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift lever to N.  If the shift lever is shifted to N 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. 4 Stop the engine .  If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible. 4 Gasoline vehicles: To stop the engine, press and hold the “START STOP ENGINE” switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. 5 Press and hold for 2 seconds or more or press briefly 3 times or more Press and hold for 2 seconds or more or press briefly 3 times or more Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises Hybrid vehicles: To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the “POWER” switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. 7 742 7-1. Essential information CAUTION ■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine . ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 743 If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing. ● The engine is running but the vehicle will not move. ● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 744 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Emergency towing Gasoline vehicles: If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. Hybrid vehicles: If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 745 Installing towing eyelet 1 Take out the towing eyelet (P. 785) 2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration. 3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. 4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 746 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage. Towing with a wheel-lift type truck  From the front Release the parking brake. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  From the rear Use a towing dolly under the front wheels. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 747 Using a flat bed truck If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. ■ Before emergency towing Release the parking brake. 2 Shift the shift lever to N. 3 Gasoline vehicles: Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode. Hybrid vehicles: Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON (hybrid system operating) mode. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises 1 748 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Caution while towing ● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cable or chain. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing. ● Gasoline vehicles: If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. Hybrid vehicles: If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. ■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing using a wheel-lift type truck Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. ■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. ■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 749 If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Visible symptoms ● Fluid leaks under the vehicle. (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal. Audible symptoms ● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the engine ● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly ● Appreciable loss of power ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road ● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises Operational symptoms 7 750 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline vehicles) To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine. Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated. 1 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off. 2 Restart the engine. NOTICE ■ Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 751 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details (U.S.A.) Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake booster system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally. (Canada) When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound. Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: P. 768 ■ Brake system warning light operation (hybrid vehicles) Although depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may cause the red brake system warning light to turn on and the buzzer to sound, this does not indicate a malfunction. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises *: Brake system warning buzzer (hybrid vehicles): 7 752 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning light (U.S.A.) (Canada) Warning light/Details Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: • The hybrid system (hybrid vehicles); • The electronic engine control system; • The electronic throttle control system; • The electronic automatic transmission control system (gasoline vehicles); or • The electronic hybrid transmission control system (hybrid vehicles) SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; • The front passenger occupant classification system; or • The seat belt pretensioner system (U.S.A.) ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; or • The brake assist system (Canada) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light 753 Warning light/Details Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system Pre-collision system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning: • The light will flash quickly when the system is operating. (P. 306) (Flashes) • The light will turn on when the pre-collision system is dis(If equipped) abled. (P. 307) • The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be used. (P. 771) Slip indicator Indicates a malfunction in: • The VSC system; • The TRAC system; or • The hill-start assist control system (hybrid vehicles) Gasoline vehicles: The light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC is operating. Hybrid vehicles: The light will flash when the ABS, the VSC, the TRAC or the hill-start assist control system is operating. Automatic headlight leveling system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system (If equipped) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises (Hybrid vehicles) Brake system warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The regenerative brake system; or • The electronically controlled brake system 754 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off. Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Open door warning light Check that all the doors and (warning buzzer)*1 Indicates that a door or the the trunk are closed. trunk is not fully closed Low fuel level warning light Indicates remaining fuel is Refuel the vehicle. approximately 2.6 gal. (9.7 L, 2.1 Imp.gal.) Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts Fasten the seat belt. If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) off. Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and P. 761 flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details 755 Correction procedure Tire pressure warning light Adjust the tire inflation pressure (including the full-size spare tire) to the specified level. When the light comes on: The light will turn off after a Low tire inflation pressure such few minutes. In case the light as does not turn off even if the • Natural causes (P. 757) tire inflation pressure is • Flat tire (P. 784) adjusted, have the system checked by your Lexus dealer. When the light comes on after Have the system checked by blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure your Lexus dealer. warning system *1: Open door warning buzzer: P. 766 *2: Driver’s seat belt buzzer: Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer: The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. 756 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 40) ■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer ● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sen- sor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. ● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly. ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: ● Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ● Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The light will go off after several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 757 ■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). ■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire Vehicles with a compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: The spare tire is also equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. ■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly P. 699 ■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound. ■ Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 758 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual. ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres- sure immediately. ● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust- ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer. ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 759 CAUTION ■ Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 760 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. NOTICE ■ Precaution when installing a different tire When differently constructed tires or tires of different makers, models or tread patterns are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 761 If a warning message is displayed If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions: 1 Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. 2 Multi-information display If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 762 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning message Details Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure The warning light may come on if the engine oil pressure is too low. Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system (Hybrid vehicles) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 763 Have the vehicle inspected immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Warning message (Flashes) Details Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system (If equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing. Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped) or the cruise control system Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises (If equipped) 7 764 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system (If equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the Automatic High Beam system (If equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message 765 Details Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (If equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the smart access system with push-button start (Flashes) 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 766 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off. Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a Make sure that all the speed of 3 mph (5 doors are closed. km/h), flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed. Indicates that the hood is not fully closed If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), flashes Close the hood. and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the hood is not yet fully closed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details 767 Correction procedure Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), flashes Close the trunk. and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed. (Flashes) Indicates that the windows are not fully closed (with the “START STOP Close all the windows. ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off, and the driver’s door open) (Flashes) Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “START STOP Close the moon roof. ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off, and the driver’s door open) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises (Flashes) Indicates that the windows and the moon roof are not fully closed (with Close all the windows the “START STOP and the moon roof. ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off, and the driver’s door open) 768 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph Correction procedure Release (5 km/h), brake. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged. (Flashes) the parking When stopping the vehicle for a long period of Indicates that the hybrid time, shift the shift lever to battery (traction battery) P. The battery cannot be is low charged with the shift lever in N. (Hybrid vehicles) (Flashes) (Hybrid vehicles) (Flashes) Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) power has dropped Restart the hybrid system because a long period of when starting the vehicle. time has elapsed after shifting the shift lever to N Indicates that the accelRelease the accelerator erator pedal is depressed pedal and shift the shift while the shift position is lever to D or R. in N (Hybrid vehicles) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message (Hybrid vehicles) (Hybrid vehicles) Details 769 Correction procedure Indicates that the EV drive mode is not available* The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the vehicle is Use the EV drive mode idling, battery charge is when it becomes availlow, speed is higher able. than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed. Indicates that engine oil Check the level of engine level is low oil, and add if necessary. (If equipped) *: For the EV drive mode operating conditions: P. 211 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises Indicates that the EV drive mode has been automatically canceled* The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the battery Drive the vehicle for a charge is low, speed is while. higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed. 770 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that intuitive parking assist sensor is Clean the sensor. dirty or covered with ice (If equipped) Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered Clean the sensor. with ice (If equipped) (If equipped) (If equipped) • Turn off the snow mode. Indicates that the radar • If the windshield wipcruise control system is ers are on, turn them unable to judge vehicleoff or set them to a to-vehicle distance mode other than AUTO or high speed wiper operation. Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle Slow the vehicle by ahead (in vehicle-to-vehi- applying the brakes. cle distance mode) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message (Flashes) Details 771 Correction procedure Indicates that there is a high possibility of a frontal Slow the vehicle by collision, or that the preapplying the brakes. collision braking function is operating (If equipped) (If equipped) (If equipped) Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) Restart the LDA (Lane system is suspended The camera sensor Departure Alert) system temperature is higher after driving for a while. than the operation temperature range. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Check around the vehicle and steer the vehicle back within the lane markers with safe steering. 7 When trouble arises Alerts the driver that the vehicle is out of the lane markers (while the LDA [Lane Departure Alert] system is operating) The warning buzzer sounds continuously. The lane line on the side the vehicle deviates from flashes. 772 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the Blind Spot Monitor sensors or Clean the sensor and its the surrounding area on surrounding area on the the bumper is dirty or bumper. covered with ice (If equipped) (Hybrid vehicles) Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated This message may be displayed when driving Stop and check. under severe operating (P. 816) conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.) Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 Refuel the vehicle. gal. (9.7 L, 2.1 Imp.gal.) or less (Flashes) (Flashes) Indicates that the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off or turned to Turn the lights off. ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on Indicates that the driver’s door was opened with the Shift the shift position to P. shift position in any position other than P (Hybrid vehicles) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 773 ■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped) In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases: ● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed ● Immediately after cruise control speed is set ● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed ■ The LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system (if equipped) In the following cases, the warning message will not be displayed even if the vehicle deviates from the lane markers. ● When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system functions ● When the lane markers cannot be recognized 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 774 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. A warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off. Warning message (If equipped) Details Correction procedure Indicates that the AutoTurn the high beam on matic High Beam switch and press the Automatic is pressed while the headHigh Beam switch again. lights are in low beam. Indicates that the washer Add washer fluid. fluid level is low (U.S.A. only) Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule* should be performed If necessary, soon. maintenance. Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) perform 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message (U.S.A. only) Details 775 Correction procedure Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*. Perform the necessary Please Comes on approxi- maintenance. reset the maintenance mately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the data after the maintemaintenance data has nance is performed (P. 658) been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the maintenance data has been reset.) Check the tire inflation Indicates that the tire pressure, and adjust to inflation pressure is low the appropriate level. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off then on again. Indicates a malfunction in If the tire pressure the tire pressure warning warning indicator system flashes for 1 minute then illuminates, there is a malfunction in the system. Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. 776 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Drive for a short while and check if the display updates. If the radio wave conditions improve, the display may return to normal. If the tire pressure is still not displayed after driving for several minutes, stop Indicates that the tire the vehicle in a safe position information canplace, turn the “START not be recognized STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off then on again, and start driving. If the tire pressure is still not displayed even after repeating this several times, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. (Flashes) (If equipped) Indicates that the pre-collision system is not cur- • Check the grille cover and the sensor and rently functional because clean them if they are the grille cover or the dirty. sensor is dirty This message also • In case of overheating, the system will become appears when the prefunctional once the syscollision system is not tem cools down. functional due to overheating. *: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 777 Have the malfunction repaired immediately. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off. Interior buzzer Once Exterior buzzer Warning message  (Flashes) Once 3 times ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Correction procedure The electronic key is not detected when an attempt is made to start the engine . Start the engine with the electronic key present. The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other than the driver’s door was opened and closed while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was in a mode other than off. Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle. The driver’s door was opened and closed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle, the shift lever was in P and the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was not turned off. Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER” > switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle. 7 When trouble arises (Flashes) Details 778 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior buzzer Once Exterior buzzer Details Correction procedure Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off and lock the doors again. (Flashes) An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off when the shift lever was in P. (Flashes) An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle. Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehicle. Warning message Continuous (Displayed alternately) 9 times Continuous   (Flashes) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) The driver’s door was opened when the shift lever was Shift the not in P and the shift lever to “START STOP P. ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was not turned off. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message ConContinuous tinuous (Displayed alternately) (Flashes)  Continuous (Flashes) Continuous (Flashes) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Correction procedure The driver’s door was opened and • Shift the shift lever closed while the to P. electronic key was not in the vehicle, • Bring the electhe shift lever was tronic key not in P and the back into “START STOP the vehiENGINE” cle. <“POWER”> switch was not turned off. An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle. An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door with the electronic key still inside the vehicle. Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again. 7 Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again. When trouble arises Once Details 779 780 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message  Gasoline vehicles (Flashes) Once   Hybrid vehicles (Flashes) Details Correction procedure • When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle. • The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was pressed two consecutive times. Touch the electronic key to the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch while depressing the brake pedal. An attempt was made to start the engine with the shift lever in an incorrect position. Shift the shift lever to P and start the engine .  Gasoline vehicles (Flashes) Once   Hybrid vehicles (Flashes) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior buzzer  Once Exterior buzzer Warning message Details 781 Correction procedure  Next time when starting the engine , increase the Power was turned engine off due to the auto- speed matic power off slightly and function. maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery.  Replace the The electronic key electronic has a low battery. key battery. (P. 710) 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 782 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message  Gasoline vehicles (Flashes) Once   Hybrid vehicles (Flashes) Once  (Flashes) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Details Correction procedure The driver’s door was opened and closed with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch turned off and then the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was put in ACCESSORY mode twice without the engine being started. Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch while depressing the brake pedal. During an engine starting procedure in the event that the electronic key was not functioning properly (P. 803), the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was touched with the electronic key. Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding. The steering lock could not be released within 3 seconds of the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch being pressed. Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch while depressing the brake pedal and moving the steering wheel left and right. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior buzzer Once Exterior buzzer Warning message  (Flashes) Once  (Flashes) Details 783 Correction procedure The “START STOP ENGINE” the <“POWER”> switch Shift has been turned off shift lever to with the shift lever P. in a position other than P or N. After the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P, the shift lever has been shifted to P. Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. ■ Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 784 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided. For details about tires: P. 694 CAUTION ■ If you have a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident. Before jacking up the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the shift lever to P. ● Stop the engine . ● Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 740) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 785 Location of the spare tire, jack and tools  Vehicles with a compact spare tire 1 Jack handle 4 Wheel nut wrench 2 Towing eyelet 5 Spare tire 3 Jack 6 Screwdriver 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 786 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency  Vehicles with a full-size spare tire 1 Towing eyelet 4 Jack handle 2 Wheel nut wrench 5 Screwdriver 3 Jack 6 Spare tire ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 787 CAUTION ■ Using the tire jack Observe the following precautions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. ● Put the jack properly in its jack point. ● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. ● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. ● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. ● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 788 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the spare tire 1 Open the luggage mat. (P. 612) 2 Remove the auxiliary boxes.  Vehicles with a compact spare tire 3 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.  Vehicles with a compact spare tire   Vehicles with a full-size spare tire Vehicles with a full-size spare tire CAUTION ■ When storing the spare tire Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 789 Replacing a flat tire 1 Chock the tires. Flat tire Front Rear 2 Wheel chock positions Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). 7 Turn the tire jack portion A by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises 3 790 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. 6 Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: Remove the wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 791 CAUTION ■ Replacing a flat tire ● Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury: • Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury. • Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns. ● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. • Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. • Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. • Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. • When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel. • If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 792 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Installing the spare tire 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off. 2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount. When replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel, turn the wheel nuts until the washers come into contact with the disc wheel. Disc wheel Washer When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat. Tapered portion Disc wheel seat ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 3 Lower the vehicle. 4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. 793 Tightening torque: 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 5 Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: Reinstall the wheel ornament. 7 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises 6 794 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ The compact spare tire ● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency. ● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 835) ■ When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. ■ When the compact spare tire is equipped The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. ■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with a com- pact spare tire) Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires: 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire. 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle. 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 795 CAUTION ■ When using the compact spare tire ● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle. ● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously. ● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera- tions that cause sudden engine braking. ■ When the compact spare tire is attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: • • • • • ABS & Brake assist VSC TRAC Cruise control Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) • PCS (if equipped) • EPS • LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (if equipped) • Rear view monitor system (if equipped) • Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) • Navigation system (if equipped) ■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. ■ After using the tools and jack Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. 796 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. ■ When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 797 If the engine will not start (gasoline vehicles) If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (P. 197), consider each of the following points: The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. ● The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures. (P. 197) ● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 80) The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. 7 One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. The starter motor does not turn over The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 798) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 805) 798 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 805) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. Emergency start function When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the “START STOP ENGINE” switch is functioning normally: 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to ACCESSORY mode. 4 Press and hold the “START STOP ENGINE” switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 799 If the hybrid system will not start (hybrid vehicles) Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure: The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (P. 204) One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 803) ● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. ● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 82) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. ● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (P. 800) The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 809) ● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises One of the following may be the cause of the problem: 7 800 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 809) Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. Emergency start function When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the “POWER” switch is functioning normally: 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode. 4 Press and hold the “POWER” switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 801 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted: 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to ACCESSORY mode. 3 Depress the brake pedal. 4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool. To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 7 5 The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises Press the shift lock override button. 802 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the electronic key does not operate properly If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 130) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below. Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions ■ Doors Use the mechanical key (P. 120) in order to perform the following operations: 1 Locks all the doors 2 Closes the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)* 3 Unlocks the door Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key once again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors. 4 Opens the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)* *: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ 803 Trunk Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. Starting the engine 1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal. 2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch. The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode. When the smart access system with push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode. 7 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that multi-information display. is shown on the 4 Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch. In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises 3 804 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Stopping the engine Shift the shift lever to P and press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch as you normally do when stopping the engine . ■ Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 710) ■ Changing “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch modes Release the brake pedal and press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in step 3 above. The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 198, 205) ■ When the electronic key does not work properly ● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deac- tivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on. (Customizable features P. 852) ● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 129) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 805 If the 12-volt battery is discharged (gasoline vehicles) The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 1 Open the hood (P. 669) 2 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure: 7 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle. 2 Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle. 3 Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises 1 806 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the 12-volt battery and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration. 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. 4 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off. 5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to IGNITION ON mode. 6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Starting the engine when the 12-volt battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically during driving.) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 807 ■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery ● Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle when the alarm operates. ● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. ● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ● The “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off. If you are unsure what mode the “START STOP ENGINE” switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery. CAUTION ■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery: ● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to ● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other. ● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12- volt battery. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. 7 808 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ 12-volt battery precautions The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: ● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery. ● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi- ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery. NOTICE ■ When handling jumper cables When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or engine drive belt. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 809 If the 12-volt battery is discharged (hybrid vehicles) The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 1 Open the trunk lid and remove the 12-volt battery cover. (P. 690) In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to open the trunk. (P. 802) 2 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure: 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 810 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 1 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle. 2 Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle. 3 Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle. 4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the 12-volt battery and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration. 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. 4 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “POWER” switch off. 5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the “POWER” switch to ON mode. 6 Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer. 7 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 811 ■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.) ■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery ● Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle when the alarm operates. ● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. ● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ● The “POWER” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the “POWER” switch off. If you are unsure what mode the “POWER” switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery. 812 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery: ● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. ● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other. ● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the bat- tery. ■ 12-volt battery precautions The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: ● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery. ● In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery. ■ After recharging the 12-volt battery Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers. ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery P. 693 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 813 If your vehicle overheats (gasoline vehicles) The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating. ● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 93) enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.) ● Steam comes out from under the hood. Follow the correction procedure as described below. 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine. 2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood. 3 After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” line on the reservoir. 1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” 3 “LOW” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7 When trouble arises If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. 814 5 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable. 6 Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses. The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.) 7 If the fan is not operating: Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. If the fan is operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns. ● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot. ● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 815 NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. ■ To prevent damage to the cooling system Observe the following precautions: ● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.). ● Do not use commercially available coolant additives. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 816 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats (hybrid vehicles) The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating. ● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 93) enters the red zone or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.) ● “Hybrid System Overheat” (P. 772) is shown on the multi-informa- tion display. ● Steam comes out from under the hood. Correction procedures ■ If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system. 2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood. 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and cooling system for leaks. If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 4 5 817 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” line on the reservoir. 1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” 3 “LOW” Add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable. 6 Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses. The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.) If the fan is not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. If the fan is operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises 7 7 818 ■ 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place. 2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood. 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” line on the reservoir. 5 1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” 3 “LOW” Add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable. 6 Start the hybrid system and check for the multi-information display. If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Lexus dealer. If the message is not displayed: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 819 CAUTION ■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns. ● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot. ● Check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY” indicator are off. ● On hybrid vehicles, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury. ● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out. NOTICE ■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system. ■ To prevent damage to the cooling system Observe the following precautions: ● Do not use commercially available coolant additives. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) When trouble arises ● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.). 7 820 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow: 1 Stop the engine . Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. 2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels. 3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction. 4 Restart the engine . 5 Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal. ■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle Press to turn off TRAC. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 821 CAUTION ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■ When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components ● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary. ● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi- cle may require towing to be freed. 7 When trouble arises ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 822 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 823 Vehicle specifications 8 8-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)................... 824 Fuel information..........................837 Tire information.......................... 840 8-2. Customization Customizable features ............852 8-3. Items to initialize Items to initialize.........................865 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 824 8-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight Overall length 192.7 in. (4895mm) Overall width 71.7 in. (1820mm) Overall height* 57.1 in. (1450mm) Wheelbase 111.0 in. (2820mm) Tread Front 62.6 in. (1590mm) Rear 62.0 in. (1575mm) Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) *: Unladen vehicle ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 905 lb. (410 kg) 8-1. Specifications 825 Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. This number is also on the Certification Label. This number is also stamped under the right-hand front seat. 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 826 ■ 8-1. Specifications Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.  2GR-FE engine ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)  2AR-FXE engine 8-1. Specifications 827 Engine  Gasoline vehicles Model 3.5L 6-cylinder (2GR-FE) Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70  3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm) Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3) Valve clearance (engine cold) Automatic adjustment Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment  Hybrid vehicles Model 2.5L 4-cylinder (2AR-FXE) Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.54  3.86 in. (90.0  98.0 mm) Displacement 152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3) Valve clearance (engine cold) Automatic adjustment 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 828 8-1. Specifications Fuel Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp.gal.) Electric motor (Traction motor) (hybrid vehicles) Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor Maximum output 105 kW Maximum torque 199 ft•lbf (270 N•m, 27.5 kgf•m) Hybrid battery (Traction battery) (hybrid vehicles) Type Nickel-metal hydride battery Voltage 7.2 V/module Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR) Quantity 34 modules Overall voltage 244.8 V ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 829 Lubrication system  Gasoline vehicles Oil capacity With filter (Drain and refill  Without filter reference*1) 6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp.qt.) 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp.qt.) *1: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.  Hybrid vehicles Oil capacity With filter (Drain and refill  Without filter reference*2) 4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.) 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.) *2: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick. 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 830 8-1. Specifications ■ Engine oil selection “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change. Outside temperature Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example): • The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. • The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions. How to read oil container label: The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 831 Cooling system  Gasoline vehicles Capacity 9.7 qt. (9.2 L, 8.1 Imp.qt.) Coolant type Use either of the following: • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone.  Hybrid vehicles Capacity Gasoline engine 7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp.qt.) Power control unit 3.4 qt. (3.2 L, 2.8 Imp.qt.) Coolant type Use either of the following: • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 832 8-1. Specifications Ignition system Spark plug  Gasoline vehicles Make DENSO FK20HR11  Hybrid vehicles DENSO FK16HR-A8  Gasoline vehicles Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)  Hybrid vehicles 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) NOTICE ■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap. Electrical system  Gasoline vehicles 12-volt battery Specific gravity reading at 68 F (20 C): 1.2501.290 Fully charged 1.1601.200 Half charged 1.0601.100 Discharged Charging rates Quick charge Slow charge  15 A max. 5 A max. Hybrid vehicles 12-volt battery Open voltage at 68 F 12.612.8 V Fully charged (20 C): 12.212.4 V Half charged 11.812.0 V Discharged (Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.) Charging rates ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 5 A max. 8-1. Specifications 833 Automatic transaxle (gasoline vehicles) Fluid capacity* 6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS *: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE ■ Transmission fluid type Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle. Hybrid transaxle (hybrid vehicles) Fluid capacity* 3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS *: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE ■ Transmission fluid type ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle. 834 8-1. Specifications Brakes  Gasoline vehicles 3.58 in. (91 mm) Min.  Hybrid vehicles Pedal clearance*1 3.62 in. (92 mm) Min. Pedal free play Brake pad wear limit 0.04 — 0.24 in. (1.0 — 6.0 mm) Front 0.06 in. (1.5 mm) Rear 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake pedal travel *2 7  10 clicks Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N, 51.0 kgf) while the engine is running . *2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf). Steering Free play ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) 8-1. Specifications 835 Tires and wheels  Type A Tire size P215/55R17 93V Front tire Tire inflation pressure 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) (Recommended cold tire Rear tire inflation pressure) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 17  7J Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)  Type B Tire size P225/45R18 91V Front tire Tire inflation pressure 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) (Recommended cold tire Rear tire inflation pressure) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 18  7 1/2J Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)  Compact spare tire (if equipped) Tire size T155/70D17 110M Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) inflation pressure) 17  4T Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Vehicle specifications Wheel size 8 836 8-1. Specifications Light bulbs Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type 9005   60 55 35 A B C  19 D Front turn signal lights 7444NA 28/8 E Front side marker lights W5W 5 F WY21W 21 E Back-up lights W16W 16 F Outer foot lights W5W 5 F Door courtesy lights  5 F Vanity lights  5 F Interior light  8 F Personal lights  8 F Trunk light  5 F Headlights High beam Low beam (halogen bulbs) Low beam (discharge bulbs) Fog lights Exterior Rear turn signal lights Interior A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs C: D4S discharge bulbs D: H16 halogen bulbs E: Wedge base bulbs (amber) F: Wedge base bulbs (clear) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 837 Fuel information You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle. Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada. ■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. ■ Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer. ■ Gasoline quality standards ● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide. ● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted. ● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance. 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 838 8-1. Specifications ■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits. ● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/ or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program. ● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tire Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tire Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiregas.com. ■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. ■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline ● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol). DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol. (15% ethanol) (50% ethanol) (85% ethanol) ● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. ● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 839 ■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. ■ If your engine knocks ● Consult your Lexus dealer. ● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. NOTICE ■ Notice on fuel quality ● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be dam- aged. ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. ● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage. ■ Fuel-related poor driveability If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Vehicle specifications ■ When refueling with gasohol 8 840 8-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols  Full-size tire  Compact spare tire ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 841 1 Tire size (P. 843) 2 DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 842) 3 Location of treadwear indicators (P. 694) 4 Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. 5 Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a biasply tire. 6 TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. 7 Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 847) 8 Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 847) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. 9 Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows. 10 Summer tires or all season tires (P. 698) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. 11 “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Vehicle specifications A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. 8 842 8-1. Specifications Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) 1 DOT symbol* 2 Tire Identification Number (TIN) 3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark 4 Tire size code 5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) 6 Manufacturing week 7 Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 843 Tire size ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. ■ 1 Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) 2 Section width (millimeters) 3 Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) 4 Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) 5 Wheel diameter (inches) 6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) Tire dimensions 1 Section width 2 Tire height 3 Wheel diameter 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 844 8-1. Specifications Tire section names 1 Bead 2 Sidewall 3 Shoulder 4 Tread 5 Belt 6 Inner liner 7 Reinforcing rubber 8 Carcass 9 Rim lines 10 Bead wires 11 Chafer ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 845 Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 846 ■ 8-1. Specifications Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 847 Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Meaning Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for Cold tire inflation presthree hours or more, or has not been driven more sure than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire sure may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended pressure inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine The sum of: (a) Curb weight Maximum loaded vehicle (b) Accessory weight weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously Production options weight considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim Rim ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 8 Vehicle specifications Normal occupant weight 848 8-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle capacity weight The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 (Total load capacity) kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity The load on an individual tire that is determined by Vehicle maximum load on distributing to each axle its share of the maximum the tire loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, Vehicle normal load on accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (disthe tire tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications Tire related term 849 Meaning CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass (a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or Intended outboard sidedeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall wall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure 8 Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Vehicle specifications Maximum permissible The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire inflation pressure may be inflated Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 850 8-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-1. Specifications Tire related term 851 Meaning Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass Treadwear (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread indicators Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing *: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 852 8-2. Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. These preferences can be changed by using the “DISP” button, by using the Remote Touch, Lexus Display Audio system screen, or at your Lexus dealer. Customizing vehicle features ■ Changing by using the Remote Touch (vehicles with a navigation system) Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ■ Changing by using the Lexus Display Audio system screen P. 344 ■ Changing by using the “DISP” button P. 103 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-2. Customization 853 Customizable features Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 1 Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed using the Lexus Display Audio system 2 Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button 3 Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the screen of the navigation system 4 Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button 5 Vehicles without a Lexus Display Audio system and navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button 6 Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 854 ■ 8-2. Customization Multi-information display(P. 98) Function “Language”* Default setting Customized setting “English” (English) (French) 1 2 3 4 5 6 — O — O O — (Spanish) “Units”* “miles (MPG)” “km (km/L)” “km (L/ 100km)” — O — O O — “Off”/”Off” “ECO lamp” (gasoline vehicles) ECO lamp/Eco Driving Indicator Light “On (Selflighting)”/ ”Off” “On (Always)”/ “Off” “On (Always)”/ “On” — O — O O — “Off”/”On” “ECO lamp” (hybrid vehicles) “Drive monitor” “Tachometer Settings” (hybrid vehicles) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) “On (Selflighting)” “Outside” “On (Selflighting)” “Off” “On (Always)” “Fuel consumption” “Cruising range” — O — O O — — O — O O — “HV Meter (Always)” “Tachometer (Always)” — O — O O — 855 8-2. Customization Default setting Customized setting “Standard” “Bright” — O — O O — “SPORT lamp” “On” “Off” — O — O O — “EV driving Indicator” (hybrid vehicles) “On” “Off” — O — O O — Function “Lamp brightness” 1 2 3 4 5 6 *: The default setting varies according to countries. ■ Door lock (P. 139, 802) Function Default setting Customized setting 1 On “Unlock on Second Key (Driver’s Off (All Turn” door doors (Allows all doors to be unlocked in — unlocked by turning the one step, all unlocked in one step) mechanical key twice in doors the driver’ door) unlocked in two steps) 2 3 4 — O — 5 6 — O “Auto Lock by Speed” (All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph [20 km/h] or higher) Off On O — O — O O “Auto Lock by Shift from P” (All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P) On Off O — O — O O “Auto Unlock by Shift to P” (All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P) On Off O — O — O O “Auto Unlock by Driver Door” (All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened) Off On O — O — O O Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8 856 ■ 8-2. Customization Smart access system with push-button start (P. 123) and wireless remote control (P. 136) Function Default setting “Lock/Unlock FeedbackTone” (Adjust the volume of buzzer sounds) 5 “Lock/Unlock FeedbackLights” (Enable/disable the operation of the emergency flashers when the vehicle is locked or unlocked) On Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 Off 1 to 7 Off O — O — O O O — O — O O “Auto Relock Timer” Off (Adjust the time elapsed 30 seconds before the automatic door 60 seconds O — O — O O lock function is activated if 120 a door is not opened after seconds being unlocked) Operation buzzer (When the vehicle is locked or unlocked) On Off — — — — — O Open door reminder buzzer (When locking the vehicle) On Off — — — — — O ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 857 8-2. Customization ■ Smart access system with push-button start (P. 123) Function Default setting Customized setting 1 2 “Access System with Elec. Key” (Smart access system with push-button start can be disabled) On Off — — O — O O “Select Doors to Unlock” (The doors that are unlocked using the smart access system with pushbutton start can be selected) Driver’s door All the doors Number of consecutive door lock operations 2 times ■ 3 4 5 6 O — O — O O As many as — desired — — — — O Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 On Off — — — — — O Wireless remote control (P. 136) Function Wireless remote control “Remote 2-Press Unlock” (Allows all doors to be unlocked by pressing on the electronic key twice) 6 One short press Trunk unlocking operation Press and Push twice hold (short) Press and hold (long) — — — — — O — — — — — O Off Alarm (panic mode) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) On Off 8 Vehicle specifications On (Driver’s Off (All door doors unlocked in O — O — O O one step, all unlocked in one step) doors unlocked in two steps) 858 ■ 8-2. Customization Driving position memory* (P. 153) Function Default setting Customized setting “Driver’s Seat Easy Exit” (Driver’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle) Standard Selecting the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation Driver’s door All doors — — — — — O Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle On Off — — — — — O 1 2 3 4 5 6 Off Partial O — O — O O *: If equipped ■ Power windows (P. 170) and moon roof (P. 173) Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 Off On — — — — — O Wireless remote control linked operation (DOWN) Off On — — — — — O Buzzer sounds if operated using wireless remote control On Off — — — — — O Function Mechanical operation key linked ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 859 8-2. Customization ■ Power windows (P. 170) Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 On Off — — — — — O Function Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 Linked operation of components when door key is used Slide only Tilt only — — — — — O Linked operation of components when wireless remote control is used Slide only Tilt only — — — — — O On Off — — — — — O Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — O Function One-touch closing ■ Moon roof (P. 173) Automatic operation ■ 6 6 Turn signal lever (P. 221) Function “Lane Change Signal Flashes” (Time of flashing of the lane change signal flashers) 6 OFF 3 5 7 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 860 ■ 8-2. Customization Automatic light control system (P. 224) Function Default setting Customized setting “Headlamps-On Sensitivity” (Adjust the sensitivity of the ambient light sensor) Standard -2 to 2 1 2 3 4 O — O — 5 6 — O “Headlamps Auto-Off Off Timer” (Adjust the time 30 seconds 60 seconds O — O — O O elapsed before the headlights automatically turn 90 seconds off) Welcome light illumination control On Off — — — — — O Function Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 “Daytime Running Lights” (Daytime running lights can be disabled)* On Off ■ Lights (P. 224) *: Except for Canada ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 6 O — O — O O 861 8-2. Customization ■ Intuitive parking assist* (P. 271) Function Default setting Customized setting “Distance (Front)” (Detection distance of the front center sensor) Far Near O — O — — O “Distance (Rear)” (Detection distance of the rear center sensor) Far Near O — O — — O “Alert Volume” (Alert volume can be adjusted) 3 1 to 5 O — O — — O “Display” (when intuitive parking assist is operating) All sensors displayed Display off O — O — — O 1 2 3 4 5 6 *: If equipped ■ Automatic air conditioning system (P. 347, 359) Function Default setting Customized setting 1 2 “Efficient Ventilation Mode” (Switching between outside air and recirculated air mode linked to “AUTO” switch operation) On Off — — O — “Auto A/C Mode” (A/C Auto switch operation) On Off O — O — — O “Smog Sensor Sensitivity” (Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) Standard -3 to 3 O — O — — O 4 5 6 — O 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 3 862 ■ 8-2. Customization Illumination (P. 603) Function Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 Interior lights illumination control On Off — — — — — O “Interior Lights Off Timer” (Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off) 6 Off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — O — O O 30 seconds Operation after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off On Off — — — — — O Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off — — — — — O Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person On Off — — — — — O Footwell lighting On Off — — — — — O Outer foot lights On Off — — — — — O “Exterior Lights Off Timer” (Time elapsed before the outer foot lights turn off) Off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — O — O O 30 seconds “Ambient illumin. (instrument panel)” (Enable/disable operation of the ornament lights on the instrument panel)* On Off Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used for dimming the meter lights etc. Standard -2 to +2 — — O — — O Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used for brightening the meter lights etc. Standard -2 to +2 — — O — — O ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) — O — O O O 863 8-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 Enable/disable operation of the outer foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person On Off — — — — — O Enable/disable operation of the outer foot lights when the doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch On Off — — — — — O Default setting Customized setting 1 2 3 4 5 On Off — — — — — O 0 second Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature 0.7 seconds 0.9 seconds — activates 1.2 seconds — — — — O 6 *: If equipped ■ Rear sunshade* (P. 623) Function Reverse operation 6 *: If equipped 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 864 8-2. Customization ■ Vehicle customization ● When the “Auto Lock by Speed” and “Auto Lock by Shift from P” are both on, the door lock operates as follows. • When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked. • If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” would not operate. • If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” will operate. ● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the “Select Doors to Unlock” cannot be customized. ● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the “Auto Relock Timer” activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the “Lock/ Unlock Feedback-Tone” and the “Lock/Unlock Feedback-Lights” settings. ■ When customizing using the Remote Touch Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features. CAUTION ■ During customization As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. NOTICE ■ During customization To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 8-3. Items to initialize 865 Items to initialize The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle: Item Maintenance only) data When to initialize Reference (U.S.A. • After the maintenance is performed P. 658 • When rotating the tires • When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc. P. 696 Tire pressure warning system 8 Vehicle specifications ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 866 8-3. Items to initialize ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 867 For owners 9 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.................................... 868 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ..............................................869 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ................................................871 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 868 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-80025-LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 869 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité ● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant pas toucher le cou ni glisser de l’épaule. ● Placez la ceinture abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ● Réglez la position du dossier. Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du siège, le dos droit. ● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité. 9 For owners ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 870 Entretien et soin ■ Ceintures de sécurité Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de l’eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles ne présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures. ATTENTION ■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Assurez-vous qu’il n’y a pas de coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les blessures graves, voire mortelles. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 871 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English. ◆ Coussins gonflables SRS avant 1 Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/du passager avant Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs 9 2 Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant For owners Un coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux pour le siège du passager avant est intégré dans la porte de la boîte à gants. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 872 ◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau 3 Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière 4 Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 873 Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS Système de classification de 10 Lampe témoin SRS l’occupant du siège du passager 11 Coussin gonflable du conducavant (ECU et capteurs) teur 2 Capteurs de choc latéral (por- 12 Coussins gonflables latéraux tières avant) arrière 1 3 Coussins gonflables de protection des genoux 13 Capteurs (arrière) 4 Coussin gonflable du passager avant 14 Capteur de position de siège du conducteur 5 Coussins gonflables en rideau 15 6 Lampes témoins “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF” Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur 16 Module de capteur de coussin gonflable 17 Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant 18 Capteurs de choc avant Dispositifs de tension et limiteurs de force des ceintures de sécurité 8 Capteurs de choc latéral (avant) 9 Coussins gonflables latéraux avant ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) choc latéral 9 For owners 7 de 874 Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable (ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l’impact et aux passagers. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour limiter le mouvement des occupants. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 875 ATTENTION ■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables SRS. Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité de la manière appropriée. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être utilisés de concert avec les ceintures de sécurité. ● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, donne les recommandations suivantes : La zone à risque d’un coussin gonflable côté conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable. Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si vous vous tenez à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs manières : ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 9 For owners • Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre encore aisément les pédales. • Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le dossier du siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule. • Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et vers le cou. Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA, tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue sur les commandes du bloc d’instrumentation. 876 ATTENTION ■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS ● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité des sièges avant sans avoir été attachée à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager avant portent tout de même leur ceinture même si elles ne sont pas attachées. Les coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors d’une collision, ce qui représente un risque de blessures graves, voire mortelles. Bouclez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité lorsque vous utilisez la rallonge. ● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit. ● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de placer et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant. (P. 55) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 877 ATTENTION ■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS ● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas sur le tableau de bord. ● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager avant. ● Ne laissez pas les occupants du siège avant tenir des objets sur leurs genoux. ● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le longeron du toit, ni sur les montants avant, latéraux ou arrière. ● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule. 9 For owners ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 878 ATTENTION ■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS ● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones telles que le tableau de bord, le tampon de volant, la partie inférieure du bloc d’instrumentation et la porte de la boîte à gants. Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du conducteur, du passager avant ou de protection des genoux se déploient. ● Ne fixez rien sur les portières, le pare-brise, les glaces latérales, les montants avant ou arrière, le longeron du toit et la poignée d’appui. ● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS en rideau. ● Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer. ● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gon- flables SRS latéraux se déploient, car ceux-ci pourraient nuire au déploiement de ces coussins. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des composants de coussins gonflables SRS. Vous risqueriez de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 879 ATTENTION ■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS ● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds. ● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonfla- bles SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées. ● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, notamment le tampon de volant et les garnitures des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus. ■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS Ne mettez pas le véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS ● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du bloc d’instru- mentation, du tableau de bord, des sièges ou du capitonnage des sièges, des montants avant, latéraux ou arrière et des longerons du toit ● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile ou du pare-chocs avant, ou du côté de l’habitacle ● Installation de lames de déneigement, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre avant (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.) ● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule ● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lecteur de CD 9 ● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques rédui- ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) For owners tes 880 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 881 Index What to do if... (Troubleshooting)................................882 Alphabetical index................................ 888 For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below. • • • • • • Navigation system Air conditioning controls Windshield wiper de-icer Audio/video system Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 882 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) What to do if... (Troubleshooting) If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus dealer. The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed You lose your keys ● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer. (P. 121) ● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (P. 122) The doors cannot be locked or unlocked ● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P. 710) ● Is the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNI- TION ON mode? When locking the doors, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off. (P. 198, 205) ● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle? When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person. ● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (P. 130) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 883 The rear door cannot be opened ● Is the child-protector lock set? The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. (P. 140) The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside ● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (P. 146) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 884 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) If you think something is wrong The engine does not start ● Did you press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (P. 197, 204) ● Is the shift lever in P? (P. 200, 207) ● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (P. 126) ● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 201, 208) ● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (P. 803) ● Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (P. 805, 809) The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal ● Is the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNI- TION ON mode? If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNITION ON mode (P. 801) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 885 The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped ● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P. 200, 207) The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches ● Is the window lock switch pressed? The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 170) The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off automatically ● Gasoline vehicles: The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of time. (P. 200) ● Hybrid vehicles: The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. (P. 207) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 886 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) A warning buzzer sounds during driving ● The seat belt reminder light is flashing Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (P. 754) ● The parking brake indicator is on Is the parking brake released? (P. 222) Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (P. 751, 761) An alarm is activated and the horn sounds ● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm? The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 84) To stop the alarm, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the engine . A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle ● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened? Check the message on the multi-information display. (P. 761) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 887 A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed ● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis- played, refer to P. 751, 761. When a problem has occurred If you have a flat tire ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (P. 784) The vehicle becomes stuck ● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (P. 820) ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 888 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index A A/C Air conditioning filter....................... 708 Automatic air conditioning system* .................................. 347, 359 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Function ................................................. 298 Warning light .......................................752 Air conditioning filter..........................708 Air conditioning system* Air conditioning filter....................... 708 Automatic air conditioning system* .................................. 347, 359 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Airbags Airbag operating conditions .......... 46 Airbag precautions for your child ......................................... 41 Airbag warning light ........................ 752 Correct driving posture....................30 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions ....................... 46 Curtain shield airbag precautions .......................................... 43 Front passenger occupant classification system......................... 49 General airbag precautions ............. 41 Locations of airbags............................38 Modification and disposal of airbags............................................... 45 Side airbag operating conditions ............................................. 46 Side airbag precautions ...................... 41 Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions ....................... 46 Side and curtain shield airbags precautions ........................... 41 SRS airbags .............................................38 Alarm ........................................................... 84 Warning buzzer.........................751, 761 Anchor brackets...................................... 59 Antennas (smart access system with push-button start) .....................125 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Function..................................................298 Warning light....................................... 752 Approach warning (dynamic radar cruise control).........................254 Armrest .....................................................622 Alphabetical index Armrest door ......................................... 626 Assist grip ................................................628 Audio input......................................422, 564 Audio system*............................376, 493 Audio input................................422, 564 AUX port...................................422, 564 Bluetooth® audio.................... 424, 541 CD player.................................394, 505 iPod.............................................. 405, 522 MP3/WMA disc ....................395, 514 Optimal use ............................. 439, 562 Portable music player..........422, 564 Radio ........................................... 379, 496 Steering wheel audio switch.........................................441, 565 USB memory............................ 413, 532 Automatic air conditioning system* ......................................347, 359 Automatic headlight leveling system .................................................... 226 Automatic High Beam ....................... 228 Automatic light control system .................................................... 224 Automatic transmission.......................214 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .............801 AUX port......................................422, 564 Auxiliary box ............................................. 611 889 B Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs ....................... 735 Wattage .................................................836 Battery (12-volt battery) ........ 685, 690 If the 12-volt battery is discharged ...................... 805, 809 Preparing and checking before winter.................................................... 326 Warning light....................................... 752 Battery (traction battery) ......................74 Bluetooth®* Audio system.............................424, 541 Hands-free system (for cellular phone) .......... 444, 568 Brake Fluid ..........................................................684 Parking brake .......................................222 Warning light.............................751, 753 Brake assist............................................. 298 Break-in tips .............................................182 Brightness control Instrument panel light control ........ 94 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .................313 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 890 Alphabetical index C Care Aluminum wheels ...............................651 Exterior...................................................650 Interior .................................................... 654 Seat belts............................................... 655 Cargo capacity........................................194 Cargo hooks ............................................612 CD player* ................................. 394, 505 Chains .......................................................328 Child restraint system Booster seats, definition ....................55 Booster seats, installation..................65 Convertible seats, definition............55 Convertible seats, installation.........62 Front passenger occupant classification system.........................49 Infant seats, definition..........................55 Infant seats, installation .......................62 Installing CRS with LATCH anchors .....................60 Installing CRS with seat belts..........62 Installing CRS with top tether strap.........................66 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Child safety.................................................54 12-volt battery precautions ..........................687, 808 Airbag precautions................................ 41 Child restraint system.........................55 How your child should wear the seat belt.......................................... 34 Installing child restraints ....................59 Moon roof precautions .................... 177 Power window lock switch.............170 Power window precautions........... 172 Rear door child-protectors............140 Removed electronic key battery precautions ..................711 Seat belt extender precautions ...........................................37 Seat belt precautions..........................58 Seat heater precautions ...................621 Trunk precautions ............................... 147 Child-protectors ....................................140 Cleaning Aluminum wheels................................651 Exterior .................................................. 650 Interior.....................................................654 Seat belts................................................655 Clock...........................................................615 Coat hooks ..............................................627 Condenser.............................................. 683 Console box........................................... 609 Console box light................................. 609 Consumption screen............................. 115 Cooling system Engine overheating ........................... 813 Hybrid system overheating........... 816 Cruise control Cruise control ..................................... 244 Dynamic radar cruise control .....248 Alphabetical index Cup holders............................................. 610 Curtain shield airbags ........................... 39 Customizable features.......................852 D Daytime running light system.......... 226 Defogger* Front windshield .................................363 Outside rear view mirrors............. 372 Rear window ........................................372 Dimension ...............................................824 Dinghy towing..........................................196 Display Dynamic radar cruise control......248 LDA (Lane Departure Alert).......265 Multi-information display ..................98 Trip information .....................................99 Warning message...............................761 Display Audio system ......................... 334 Display settings ...................................339 Setup menu............................................ 341 Do-it-yourself maintenance.............665 Door courtesy lights Location................................................. 603 Wattage................................................. 836 Doors Automatic door locking and unlocking system...................... 141 Door glasses ......................................... 170 Door lock................................................ 139 Open door warning buzzer...........127 Open door warning light...............754 Outside rear view mirrors...............167 Rear door child-protector.............. 140 891 Driver’s seat position memory..........153 Driving Break-in tips...........................................182 Correct driving posture....................30 Driving mode select switch..........296 Hybrid vehicle driving tips ............ 323 Procedures............................................ 180 Winter drive tips ................................ 326 Dynamic radar cruise control Function..................................................248 Warning message................. 763, 770 E Eco drive mode......................................296 Eco Driving Indicator ...........................105 EDR (Event data recorder).....................11 Electric motor (traction motor)..........70 Electric Power Steering (EPS) Function..................................................299 Warning light....................................... 753 Warning message............................. 764 Electronic key..........................................120 Battery-saving function ....................129 If the electronic key does not operate properly............................802 Replacing the battery ........................710 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 892 Alphabetical index Emergency, in case of If the 12-volt battery is discharged...........................805, 809 If the electronic key does not operate properly ....... 802 If the engine will not start................797 If the hybrid system will not start................................................799 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .............801 If the warning buzzer sounds................................................... 751 If the warning light turns on............ 751 If the warning message is displayed ..........................................761 If you have a flat tire ..........................784 If you think something is wrong...............................................749 If your vehicle becomes stuck..................................................... 820 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency............741 If your vehicle needs to be towed .......................................743 If your vehicle overheats ...... 813, 816 Emergency flashers............................. 740 Energy monitor ........................................110 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Engine Accessory mode ................................ 198 Compartment ..................................... 673 Engine switch ............................197, 204 Hood........................................................669 How to start the engine....................197 How to start the hybrid system..................................................204 Identification number.......................826 If the engine will not start ............... 797 Ignition switch (“POWER” switch)..................................................204 Ignition switch (“START STOP ENGINE” switch) ...........................197 Overheating................................813, 816 “Power” switch....................................204 “START STOP ENGINE” switch .....................................................197 Engine compartment cover..............675 Engine coolant Capacity.................................................. 831 Checking ................................................ 681 Preparing and checking before winter.................................... 326 Engine coolant temperature gauge.........................................................93 Engine immobilizer system................. 80 Engine oil Capacity.................................................829 Checking ............................................... 676 Oil level warning message...........769 Oil pressure warning message........................... 762 Preparing and checking before winter.................................... 326 Alphabetical index Enhanced VSC .....................................298 EPS (Electronic Power Steering) Function ..................................................299 Warning light .......................................753 Warning message.............................764 Event data recorder (EDR).................... 11 F Flat tire ...................................................... 784 Floor mats................................................... 28 Fluid Automatic transaxle......................... 833 Brake....................................................... 834 Hybrid transaxle ................................ 833 Washer ..................................................689 Fog lights Replacing light bulbs........................728 Switch.......................................................234 Wattage................................................. 836 Footwell light ..........................................603 Front passenger occupant classification system............................ 49 Front personal lights............................604 Front seats Adjustment...............................................151 Cleaning................................................ 654 Correct driving posture ....................30 Driving position memory ................ 153 Head restraints..................................... 159 Power easy access system ............156 Seat heaters ......................................... 620 Seat position memory....................... 153 Seat ventilators................................... 620 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 893 Front side marker lights Light switch........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs ........................732 Welcome light illumination control....................................................123 Wattage .................................................836 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .......................730 Turn signal lever................................... 221 Wattage .................................................836 Fuel Capacity.................................................828 Fuel gauge ............................................... 93 Fuel pump shut off system ............750 Information............................................837 Refueling ................................................ 239 Type..........................................................828 Warning light....................................... 754 Warning messages ...........................772 Fuel filler door........................................ 239 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened......................... 242 Refueling ................................................ 239 Fuel pump shut off system ................ 750 Fuses............................................................ 712 G Garage door opener...........................629 Gauges.........................................................93 Glove box ...............................................608 Glove box light......................................608 Grocery bag hooks............................... 612 894 Alphabetical index H Hands-free system (for cellular phone)* ............ 444, 568 Head restraints....................................... 159 Headlights Discharge headlights precautions........................................ 737 Light switch ........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs.............................. 726, 727, 736 Wattage................................................. 836 Heaters Air conditioning system* .................................. 347, 359 Heated steering wheel.....................618 Seat heaters ......................................... 620 Outside rear view mirrors*..........372 High-voltage components ...................74 Hill-start assist control........................304 Hood.......................................................... 669 Warning message.............................766 Hooks Cargo hooks......................................... 612 Coat hooks ...........................................627 Grocery bag hooks........................... 612 Retaining hooks (floor mat).............28 Horn........................................................... 223 Hybrid battery (traction battery) ...................................74 Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents................ 75 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Hybrid system............................................70 Emergency shut off system ............. 75 Energy monitor/consumption screen ................................................... 108 EV drive mode .......................................211 High voltage components................74 Hybrid System Indicator................... 96 Hybrid system precautions ..............74 Hybrid vehicle driving tips ............ 323 If the hybrid system will not start ............................................... 799 Overheating.......................................... 816 “Power” (ignition) switch ...............204 Starting the hybrid system.............204 Vehicle proximity notification system....................................................... 71 Hybrid System Indicator .......................96 Hybrid transmission .............................. 217 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.................................... 801 Alphabetical index I I/M test ..................................................... 664 Identification Engine..................................................... 826 Vehicle ................................................... 825 Ignition switch (“POWER” switch)....................................................204 Ignition switch (“START STOP ENGINE” switch) ...............................197 Illuminated entry system....................605 Immobilizer system........................ 80, 82 Indicators ......................................................91 Initialization Maintenance........................................658 Tire pressure warning system............................... 695 Initiators (tire pressure warning system)...................................701 Inside rear view mirror.........................164 Instrument panel light control ............ 94 Interior light.............................................603 Intuitive parking assist Function ....................................................271 Warning message.................763, 770 895 J Jack Positioning a floor jack....................670 Vehicle-equipped jack...................785 Jack handle .................................................785 Jam protection function Moon roof...............................................175 Power trunk opener and closer ............................................146 Power windows......................................171 K Keyless entry Smart access system with push-button start....................123 Wireless remote control..................136 Keys Battery-saving function ....................129 Electronic key........................................120 Engine switch ............................197, 204 If the electronic key does not operate properly........802 Key number plate................................120 Keyless entry............................... 123, 136 Mechanical key.....................................120 “Power” switch....................................204 Replacing the battery ........................710 “START STOP ENGINE” switch .....................................................197 Warning buzzer................................... 127 Wireless remote control key.........136 Knee airbags ............................................. 38 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 896 Alphabetical index L Language (multi-information display)............853 LATCH anchors ...................................... 60 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) .......... 263 Lever Auxiliary catch lever ........................ 669 Hood lock release lever................ 669 Internal trunk release lever..............147 Shift lever........................................214, 217 Turn signal lever ...................................221 Wiper lever...........................................235 Lexus Display Audio system............ 334 Display settings ...................................339 Setup menu............................................ 341 Lexus Enform* License plate lights Light switch ........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs........................736 Welcome light illumination control ..........................123 Light bulbs Replacing ............................................... 724 Wattage................................................. 836 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Lights Fog light switch................................... 234 Headlight switch ................................ 224 Illuminated entry system................ 605 Interior light...........................................604 Interior lights list..................................603 Personal lights.....................................604 Replacing light bulbs ........................724 Trunk light................................................146 Turn signal lever................................... 221 Vanity lights............................................614 Wattage .................................................836 Welcome light illumination control....................................................123 Lock steering column......................... 200 Low profile tire ...................................... 698 Luggage security system ....................145 M Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance .........665 General maintenance .................... 660 Maintenance data..............................824 Maintenance requirements ..........657 Malfunction indicator lamp...............752 Master warning light............................754 Meter.............................................................93 Indicators ....................................................91 Instrument panel light control ........ 94 Multi-information display..................98 Warning lights........................................89 Micro dust and pollen filter.............. 365 Alphabetical index Mirrors Inside rear view mirror..................... 164 Outside rear view mirror defoggers* ........................................372 Outside rear view mirrors...............167 Vanity mirrors....................................... 614 Moon roof Door lock linked moon roof operation..................... 175 Jam protection function................... 175 Operation................................................173 Warning message.............................767 MP3 disc* .....................................395, 514 Multi-information display.....................98 Dynamic radar cruise control......248 Energy monitor......................................110 Language.............................................. 852 Switching the display...........................99 Trip information .....................................99 Warning message...............................761 897 O Odometer...................................................93 Oil Engine oil ...............................................829 Opener Hood........................................................669 Trunk..........................................................144 Ornament lights ................................... 603 Outer foot lights Outer foot lights.................................603 Wattage .................................................836 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding ........................167 Blind spot monitor ..............................313 Linked mirror function when reversing................................. 168 Mirror position memory ..................153 Outside rear view mirror defoggers* .........................372 Outside temperature display..............99 Overheating.................................. 813, 816 N Navigation system* Noise from under vehicle ....................... 8 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 898 Alphabetical index P Parking assist sensors (intuitive parking assist) ....................271 Parking brake Operation.............................................. 222 Parking brake engaged warning buzzer .............................. 768 Parking brake engaged warning message .......................... 768 Parking lights Light switch ........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs........................736 Welcome light illumination control ..........................123 PCS (Pre-Collision System) Function ................................................. 306 PCS OFF switch ................................307 Warning light .......................................753 Warning message........................ 763, 771, 776 Personal lights........................................604 Power control unit ...................................74 Power control unit coolant Capacity ..................................................831 Checking.................................................681 Preparing and checking before winter ....................................326 Radiator ................................................. 683 Power easy access system .................156 Power outlets ...........................................616 Power steering (Electric Power Steering system)................................ 299 Warning light .......................................753 Warning message.............................764 “Power” switch.......................................204 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Power trunk opener and closer ....... 144 Power windows Door lock linked window operation ........................... 172 Jam protection function......................171 Operation................................................170 Window lock switch ..........................170 Pre-Collision System (PCS) Function..................................................306 PCS OFF switch................................307 Warning light....................................... 753 Warning message.........................763, 771, 776 R Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise control)........................ 248 Radiator.................................................... 683 Radio* ........................................... 379, 496 RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data Systems)* ......................382, 499 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)..........................................313 Rear personal lights ............................ 604 Rear side marker lights Light switch........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs ....................... 736 Welcome light illumination control..........................123 Rear door sunshades...........................623 Rear sunshade Operation.............................................. 623 Reverse operation feature ............ 624 Alphabetical index Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................734 Turn signal lever ...................................221 Wattage................................................. 836 Rear view mirror Inside rear view mirror..................... 164 Outside rear view mirrors...............167 Rear window defoggers* ................. 372 Refueling .................................................. 239 Capacity ................................................ 828 Fuel types .............................................. 828 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ......................... 242 Opening the fuel tank cap...............241 Regenerative braking.............................72 Remote Touch* ..................................... 109 Replacing Electronic key battery....................... 710 Fuses...........................................................712 Light bulbs............................................. 724 Tires ..........................................................784 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners...................................868 Reset the maintenance data ............658 Road accident cautions ........................ 78 899 S Safety Connect .......................................641 Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt........................ 33 Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 34 Child restraint system installation ............................................. 62 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt.......................................655 Emergency Locking Retractor................................................ 34 How to wear your seat belt..............32 How your child should wear the seat belt.......................................... 34 Pre-collision seat belts....................... 34 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use ......................................... 35 Reminder light and buzzer........... 754 Seat belt extender ................................ 34 Seat belt pretensioners...................... 33 SRS warning light .............................. 752 Seat heaters............................................ 620 Seat position memory ..........................153 Seat ventilators...................................... 620 Seating capacity .....................................194 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 900 Alphabetical index Seats Adjustment...............................................151 Adjustment precautions .................. 152 Child seats/child restraint system installation..............................59 Cleaning................................................ 654 Driving position memory ................ 153 Head restraints..................................... 159 Power easy access system ............156 Properly sitting in the seat ................30 Seat heaters ......................................... 620 Seat position memory....................... 153 Seat ventilators................................... 620 Sensor Automatic headlight system.........226 Humidity sensor ......................358, 371 Inside rear view mirror..................... 166 Intuitive parking assist........................271 LDA (Lane Departure Alert).......269 Radar sensor ................. 257, 307, 316 Rain-sensing windshield wipers...................................................237 Service reminder indicators ...............88 Shift lever Automatic transmission ....................214 Hybrid transmission............................217 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .............801 Shift lever light .......................................603 Shift lock system..................................... 801 Side airbags ............................................... 39 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Side marker lights Light switch........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs ........... 732, 736 Welcome light illumination control....................................................123 Side mirrors Adjusting and folding ........................167 Blind Spot Monitor .............................313 Linked mirror function when reversing................................. 168 Mirror position memory ..................153 Side turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ....................... 736 Turn signal lever................................... 221 Smart access system with push-button start Antenna location..................................125 Entry functions ......................................123 Starting the engine..............................197 Starting the hybrid system.............204 Warning message.............................765 Snow tires................................................ 330 Spare tire ..................................................784 Inflation pressure................................835 Storage location.................................785 Spark plug ............................................... 832 Specifications......................................... 824 Speedometer.............................................93 “START STOP ENGINE” switch ....................................................... 197 Alphabetical index Steering lock ..........................................200 Column lock release......................... 201 Steering lock system warning message ...........................782 Steering wheel Adjustment............................................. 162 Audio switches*......................441, 565 Heated steering wheel.....................618 Power easy access system ............156 Steering wheel position memory.............................. 153 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs........................736 Storage feature .....................................606 Stuck If the vehicle becomes stuck ....... 820 Sun visors...................................................614 Sun shade Rear...........................................................623 Rear door...............................................623 Roof............................................................ 175 901 Switches Audio remote control switches* ................................ 441, 565 BSM (Blind spot monitor) switch .....................................................313 Cruise control switch ...................... 244 “DISP” button.......................................... 99 Door lock switches.............................139 Driving mode select switch..........296 Driving position memory switches ................................................153 Dynamic radar cruise control switch...................................248 Emergency flashers switch...........740 EV drive mode switch ........................211 Fog light switch................................... 234 Garage door opener switches ..............................................629 Heated steering wheel switch .................................................... 618 Ignition switch............................197, 204 Intuitive parking assist........................ 271 Light switches...................................... 224 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch ................................................... 264 Moon roof switches ........................... 173 Outside rear view mirror switches ................................................167 PCS OFF switch................................307 Power door lock switch...................139 “Power” switch....................................204 Power window switches..................170 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 902 Alphabetical index Rear sunshade switch......................623 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch* ................................................372 Seat heater switches........................ 620 Seat ventilator switches ................. 620 “SOS” button......................................... 641 “START STOP ENGINE” switch......................................................197 Talk switch* ..............................444, 574 Telephone switches* ...........444, 574 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch ................. 162 Tire pressure warning reset switch................................................... 696 Trunk closer switch............................ 145 Trunk opener switch ......................... 144 Trunk opener main switch.............. 145 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button .................................................... 251 VSC OFF switch ..............................300 Window lock switch.......................... 170 Windshield wipers and washer switch .........................235 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) T Tachometer ................................................93 Tail lights Light switch........................................... 224 Replacing light bulbs ....................... 736 Welcome light illumination control....................................................123 Talk switch* ................................. 444, 574 Telephone switches*............... 444, 574 Theft deterrent system Alarm .......................................................... 84 Engine immobilizer system .............80 Immobilizer system.............................. 82 Tire inflation pressure Maintenance data..............................835 Tire inflation pressure display function................................................... 101 Warning light.......................................755 Warning message............................. 775 Tire information ....................................840 Glossary.................................................847 Size ...........................................................843 Tire identification number .............842 Uniform Tire Quality Grading..............................................845 Tire pressure warning system Function..................................................695 Initializing ...............................................695 Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters................695 Registering ID codes.......................697 Tire pressure warning reset switch ...................................................696 Warning light.......................................755 Warning message..................775, 776 Alphabetical index Tires Chains..................................................... 328 Checking............................................... 694 If you have a flat tire ..........................784 Inflation pressure............................... 835 Information ...........................................840 Replacing ...............................................784 Rotating tires ....................................... 694 Size........................................................... 835 Snow tires ............................................. 330 Spare tire................................................784 Tire inflation pressure display function...................................................101 Tire pressure warning system .... 695 Warning light .......................................755 Warning message.............................775 Tools...........................................................785 Top tether strap........................................ 66 Total load capacity.................................194 Towing Dinghy towing ...................................... 196 Emergency towing............................743 Towing eyelet.......................................745 Trailer towing ........................................195 TRAC (Traction Control) .................298 Traction battery (hybrid battery) .......74 Traction motor (electric motor) .........74 Transmission Automatic transmission ....................214 Driving mode select switch ..........296 Hybrid transmission............................217 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ....................................801 Trip information........................................ 99 Trip meters ................................................. 93 903 Trunk Internal trunk release lever ............. 147 Jam protection function....................146 Luggage security system.................145 Open trunk warning message.... 767 Power trunk opener and closer...144 Smart access system with push-button start....................124 Trunk closer switch.............................145 Trunk easy closer ................................146 Trunk features........................................612 Trunk handle ..........................................145 Trunk light................................................146 Trunk opener main switch ..............145 Trunk opener switch..........................144 Trunk storage extension ................626 Wireless remote control..................136 Trunk light Trunk light................................................146 Wattage .................................................836 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ........... 730, 734 Turn signal lever................................... 221 Wattage .................................................836 U USB memory ............................... 413, 532 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 904 Alphabetical index V Vanity lights Vanity lights ........................................... 614 Wattage................................................. 836 Vanity mirrors............................................. 614 Vehicle data recordings .........................10 Vehicle identification number.........825 Vehicle Stability Control (VSC).....................................................298 Ventilators (seat ventilators)............620 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ............298 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) W Warning buzzers Brake system .........................................751 Downshifting..........................................216 Key reminder....................................... 779 Open door ...........................................766 Open moon roof ............................... 767 Open hood...........................................766 Open trunk........................................... 767 Open window..................................... 767 Seat belt reminder............................. 754 Warning lights .......................................... 89 ABS .......................................................... 752 Brake system .............................751, 753 Charging system ............................... 752 Electric power steering .................. 753 Low fuel level....................................... 754 Malfunction indicator lamp........... 752 Master warning light ........................ 754 Open door ........................................... 754 Pre-collision system ......................... 753 Seat belt reminder light .................. 754 Slip indicator ........................................ 753 SRS............................................................ 752 Tire pressure........................................755 Warning messages................................ 761 Washer Checking .............................................. 689 Low washer fluid warning message............................774 Preparing and checking before winter.................................... 326 Switch ...................................................... 235 Washing and waxing .......................... 650 Alphabetical index 905 Weight Cargo capacity.................................... 194 Load limits............................................... 194 Weight.....................................................824 Welcome light illumination control......................................................123 Wheels Replacing wheels.............................. 706 Size........................................................... 835 Window glasses......................................170 Window lock switch ..............................170 Windows Power windows................................... 170 Rear window defogger* ............... 372 Windshield wiper de-icer ................. 374 Windshield wipers Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster .....235 Position....................................................329 Rain-sensing windshield wipers...................................................236 Winter driving tips................................ 326 Wireless remote control key Battery-Saving Function.................. 129 Locking/Unlocking............................ 136 Replacing the battery........................ 710 WMA disc* ..................................395, 514 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 906 Alphabetical index ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) Alphabetical index ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U) 907 908 GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever Trunk opener Fuel filler door P. 669 P. 144 P. 241 Hood lock release lever Fuel filler door opener Tire inflation pressure P. 669 P. 241 P. 835 Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp.gal.) Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill — reference) Engine oil type P. 828 P. 835 With filter Without filter 2GR-FE 6.4 (6.1, 5.4) 6.0 (5.7, 5.0) qt. (L, Imp.qt.) 2AR-FXE 4.6 (4.4, 3.9) 4.2 (4.0, 3.5) “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 P. 829 ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)